Pentax K-R Operating Manual
Reklam
Reklam
SLR Digital Camera
Operating Manual
For optimum camera performance, please read the Operating
Manual before using the camera.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 0 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX W Digital Camera. Please read this manual before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions.
Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the camera’s capabilities.
Lenses you can use
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J lenses and lenses that have an s (Auto) position on the aperture ring. To use any other
lens or accessory, see p.56 and p.312.
Regarding copyrights
Images taken with the W that are for anything other than personal enjoyment cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright
Act. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used outside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care should be taken here also.
Regarding trademarks
PENTAX, W and smc PENTAX are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility and SDM are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The DNG logo is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
IrSimple™ and IrSST™ Trademarks are owned by the Infrared Data Association
®
.
All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. However, the TM or ® marks are not used in all cases in this manual.
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more faithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not
PRINT Image Matching III compliant.
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 1 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
To users of this camera
• Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage the stored data, or affect the product’s internal circuitry and cause camera misoperation.
• The liquid crystal panel used in the monitor is manufactured using extremely high precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this manual are different from the actual ones.
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a
Macintosh hereafter.
• The camera can use either D-LI109 battery or the optional AA battery holder D-BH109 with four AA batteries. In this manual, both the D-LI109 and D-BH109 are referred to as the battery hereafter.
Except stated above, the generic term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of batteries used for this camera and its accessories.
1
For Using Your Camera Safely
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this product, we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following symbols.
Warning
Caution
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause serious personal injuries.
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.
About the Camera
Warning
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside the camera, with the risk of electric shock.
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera, never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.
• Do not look directly at the sun through the camera with a telephoto lens attached, as viewing the sun may damage your eyes. Viewing the sun directly with a telephoto lens may lead to a loss of eyesight.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest
PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 2 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burn yourself.
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may occur.
• Do not send data via infrared transmission with the infrared port of the camera pointed at a person’s eyes. Doing so may cause impaired eyesight and other injury.
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperature burns when holding such portions for long periods.
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera and get medical attention immediately.
About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter
Warning
• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this product, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter with an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If thunderstorm should be present during use of the battery charger and AC plug cord, unplug the power plug and discontinue use. Continuing to use the product can cause damage to the equipment, fire or electrical shock.
• Wipe off the power plug if it should become covered with dust. Accumulated dust may cause a fire.
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL certified power supply cord set, cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other is provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial type configuration) or the equivalent.
Caution
• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord. Doing so may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX
Service Center.
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord is plugged in.
• Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. This can cause an electric shock.
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause equipment breakdown.
• Do not use the battery charger to charge batteries other than the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109. Attempting to charge other types of batteries may cause an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 3 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
About the Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery
Warning
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.
Caution
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion or leakage.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of the battery.
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Precautions for D-LI109 Battery Usage:
USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.
- DO NOT INCINERATE.
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
- DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.
- DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F / 60°C)
About the Usage of AA Batteries
Warning
• If any leakage from the batteries should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.
Caution
• When using the optional AA battery holder D-BH109, four AA alkaline, AA lithium or
AA Ni-MH batteries can be used. Do not use batteries other than those specified here.
Using other types of batteries may cause the camera to function poorly, or the batteries may explode or cause a fire.
• AA alkaline and AA lithium batteries cannot be recharged. Do not disassemble the batteries. Attempting to charge non-rechargeable batteries or disassembling the batteries could result in explosion or leakage.
• The batteries should be inserted correctly, observing (+) and (-) marks on the batteries. Inserting the batteries incorrectly may cause an explosion or fire.
• When replacing the batteries, do not combine different brands, types or capacities.
Also, do not combine old batteries with new ones. Doing so may cause the batteries to explode or cause a fire.
• Do not short the batteries or dispose of the batteries in fire. Do not disassemble the batteries. The batteries could explode or catch fire.
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 4 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
• Do not charge any batteries other than rechargeable Ni-MH batteries. The batteries could explode or catch fire. AA batteries for use with this camera other than Ni-MH batteries cannot be charged.
• If any leakage from the batteries should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Remove the batteries from the camera immediately if they become hot or begin to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
Keep the Camera and its Accessories out of the Reach of Small Children
Warning
• Do not place the camera and its accessories within the reach of small children.
1. If the product falls or is operated accidentally it may cause serious personal injuries.
2. Wrapping the strap around a neck may cause suffocation.
3. To avoid the risk of a small accessory such as the battery or SD Memory Cards from being swallowed by mistake, keep them out of the reach of small children.
Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is accidentally swallowed.
Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Using Your Camera
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or when traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.
About the Battery and Charger
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance. Avoid storing in high temperatures.
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will over-discharge and shorten the battery’s life.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera is developed exclusively for the battery charger D-BC109. Do not use it with other devices.
Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave the camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 5 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion to protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.
• The temperature range for camera use is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).
• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal at normal temperatures.
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.
• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove the camera after temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts. These could cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any rain or water drops.
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause it to break or malfunction.
• Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.
5
Cleaning Your Camera
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or benzine.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder. Never use a spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the CMOS sensor. (This will involve a fee.)
Storing Your Camera
• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera. Remove the camera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated place.
Other Precautions
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain high performance.
• Refer to “Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card” (p.53) regarding the SD
Memory Card.
• Please note that deleting data stored on an SD Memory Card, or formatting an SD
Memory Card does not completely erase the original data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered using commercially available software. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure the privacy of such data.
Regarding Product Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration, which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX
website. Refer to p.301 for details. Thank you for your cooperation.
6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 6 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Contents
For Using Your Camera Safely ............................................................ 1
Care to be Taken During Handling ...................................................... 4
Composition of the Operating Manual ............................................... 13
Before Using Your Camera 15
W Camera Characteristics.....................................................16
Checking the Contents of the Package ......................................18
Names and Functions of Working Parts ....................................19
Capture Mode .................................................................................... 20
Playback Mode .................................................................................. 22
Display Indicators.........................................................................24
How to Change Function Settings ..............................................34
Using the Direct Keys ........................................................................ 34
Using the Control Panel ..................................................................... 35
Using the Menus ................................................................................ 37
Getting Started 41
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................42
Inserting the Battery.....................................................................43
Using the Lithium-ion Battery............................................................. 43
Using the AA Batteries....................................................................... 46
Battery Level Indicator ....................................................................... 49
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time (Fully
Charged Battery/New AA Batteries) .................................................. 49
Using the AC Adapter (Optional) ....................................................... 50
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card...................................52
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level .................................................... 54
Attaching a Lens...........................................................................56
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter................................................58
Turning the Camera On and Off ..................................................59
Initial Settings ...............................................................................60
Setting the Display Language ............................................................ 60
Setting the Date and Time ................................................................. 64
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 7 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Basic Operations 67
Basic Shooting Operation ...........................................................68
Holding the Camera ........................................................................... 68
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings.............................. 69
Using a Zoom Lens ......................................................................74
Using the Built-in Flash ...............................................................75
Setting the Flash Mode ...................................................................... 75
Compensating Flash Output .............................................................. 81
Playing Back Pictures ..................................................................82
Playing Back Images ......................................................................... 82
Deleting a Single Image..................................................................... 84
Shooting Functions 85
How to Operate the Shooting Functions....................................86
Direct Keys Setting Items................................................................... 86
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items.......................................................... 87
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items .................................................. 89
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode...................................91
H Modes......................................................................................... 93
Exposure Modes ................................................................................ 95
Setting the Exposure....................................................................96
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed ................................................ 96
Setting the Sensitivity......................................................................... 98
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)................................. 100
Changing the Exposure Mode ......................................................... 103
Selecting the Metering Method ........................................................ 114
Adjusting the Exposure .................................................................... 117
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting
Focusing......................................................................................122
Using the Autofocus......................................................................... 122
Setting the AF Mode ........................................................................ 125
AF Fine Adjustment ......................................................................... 128
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)........................................... 129
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock) ...................................................... 132
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus) ................................ 134
7
8
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 8 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before
Shooting (Preview) .....................................................................137
Assigning the Preview Function to the Green Button ...................... 137
Displaying the Optical Preview ........................................................ 139
Displaying the Digital Preview.......................................................... 140
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera
Shake ...........................................................................................141
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function..................... 141
Shooting with Self-timer ................................................................... 145
Shooting with Remote Control (Optional) ........................................ 147
Taking Pictures Continuously...................................................149
Continuous Shooting........................................................................ 149
Interval Shooting .............................................................................. 151
Multi-exposure ................................................................................. 153
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters ........................................155
Shooting with Live View ............................................................159
Setting Live View ............................................................................. 160
Taking Still Pictures ......................................................................... 162
Recording Movies.......................................................................165
Changing the Movie Settings ........................................................... 165
Recording Movies ............................................................................ 167
Playing Back Movies........................................................................ 169
Editing Movies.................................................................................. 171
Using the Flash 173
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode........................174
Using the Slow-speed Sync ............................................................. 174
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync ....................................................... 176
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash............178
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash ...............................179
Using an External Flash (Optional)...........................................180
Using P-TTL Auto Mode .................................................................. 181
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode ............................................... 182
Using Flash in Wireless Mode ......................................................... 183
Connecting an External Flash with an Extension Cord.................... 187
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension Cords .............................. 188
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash............................................................ 189
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 9 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Shooting Settings 191
Setting a File Format ..................................................................192
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels .................................................. 192
Setting the JPEG Quality Level........................................................ 193
Setting the File Format..................................................................... 195
Setting the Green Button Function...........................................197
Setting the White Balance .........................................................200
Adjusting the White Balance Manually............................................. 202
Fine-Tuning the White Balance........................................................ 204
Setting the Color Space ................................................................... 205
Correcting Images ......................................................................207
Adjusting Brightness ........................................................................ 207
Lens Correction................................................................................ 211
Setting the Image Finishing Tone .............................................213
Setting Custom Image ..................................................................... 213
Setting Cross Processing................................................................. 216
Playback Functions 219
Playback Functions Operation..................................................220
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items .............................................. 220
Playback Menu Setting Items .......................................................... 221
Setting the Playback Display Method.......................................222
Enlarging Images........................................................................223
Displaying Multiple Images .......................................................224
Multi-image Display Screen ............................................................. 224
Displaying Images by Folder............................................................ 225
Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar Display) ................ 226
Comparing Images........................................................................... 228
Joining Multiple Images (Index) ....................................................... 229
Playing Back Images Continuously..........................................232
Setting the Slideshow Display.......................................................... 232
Starting the Slideshow ..................................................................... 233
Rotating Images..........................................................................235
Deleting Multiple Images ...........................................................236
Deleting Selected Images ................................................................ 236
Deleting a Folder.............................................................................. 238
Deleting All Images .......................................................................... 239
9
10
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 10 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ..............................240
Protecting a Single Image................................................................ 240
Protecting All Images ....................................................................... 241
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device .................................242
Exchanging Image Data with Other Devices............................244
Sending and Receiving Image Data via Infrared Transmission ....... 244
Playing a Dueling Game using Your Images (Dueling Images)....... 246
Processing Images 249
Changing the Image Size ...........................................................250
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping) ........................................ 251
Processing Images with Digital Filters.....................................253
Applying the Digital Filter ................................................................. 255
Recreating Filter Effects................................................................... 256
Searching for the Original Image ..................................................... 258
Developing RAW Images ...........................................................259
Developing One RAW Image........................................................... 259
Developing Multiple RAW Images ................................................... 260
Specifying the Parameters............................................................... 262
Changing Additional Settings 265
How to Operate the Set-up Menu ..............................................266
Set-up Menu Setting Items .............................................................. 266
Formatting an SD Memory Card................................................268
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display Language ......269
Setting the Beep .............................................................................. 269
Changing the Date and Time Display .............................................. 270
Setting the World Time .................................................................... 270
Setting the Display Language .......................................................... 273
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display ..........................274
Setting the Text Size........................................................................ 274
Setting the Guide Display Time ....................................................... 274
Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed ............................................ 275
Setting the Status Screen Display ................................................... 276
Setting the Display for Instant Review ............................................. 276
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor ........................................... 277
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor.................................................... 278
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 11 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Folder/File Number .................................................279
Changing the Naming System of the Folder .................................... 279
Creating New Folders ...................................................................... 279
Selecting the File Number Setting ................................................... 280
Selecting the Power Settings ....................................................281
Setting the Auto Power Off Function................................................ 281
Setting the Battery Type .................................................................. 282
Setting the Photographer Information......................................283
Setting the DPOF Settings.........................................................285
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor
(Pixel Mapping) ...........................................................................287
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory)...............288
Connecting to a Computer 291
Manipulating Captured Images on a Computer.......................292
Saving Images on Your Computer............................................293
Setting the USB Connection Mode .................................................. 293
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera and Your Computer .. 294
Using the Provided Software.....................................................296
Installing the Software...................................................................... 296
Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4............................. 298
11
12
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 12 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Appendix 303
Default Settings ..........................................................................304
Resetting the Menus ..................................................................310
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menus .......................... 310
Resetting the Custom Menu ............................................................ 311
Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations...........312
Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring] ................................................. 314
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor .......................................................315
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Removal) ................................................................................ 315
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor
Removing Dust with a Blower .......................................................... 318
Optional Accessories.................................................................320
Error Messages...........................................................................325
Troubleshooting .........................................................................328
Main Specifications ....................................................................331
Glossary ......................................................................................337
WARRANTY POLICY ..................................................................348
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 13 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
13
Composition of the Operating Manual
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions of various parts.
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read this chapter and follow the instructions.
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.
Explains the shooting-related functions.
Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.
Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file format.
Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting images.
Explains the procedures for changing the image size, applying digital filters and developing images taken in RAW format.
9 Changing Additional Settings
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor display settings and the image folder naming convention.
Explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation instructions and a general overview of the provided software.
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various resources.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 14 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
14
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.
1 Indicates reference page number explaining a related operation.
Indicates useful information.
Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 15 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
1
Before Using Your
Camera
Check the package contents and the names and functions of working parts before use.
W Camera Characteristics ............................16
Checking the Contents of the Package ..............18
Names and Functions of Working Parts ............ 19
Display Indicators ................................................ 24
How to Change Function Settings ...................... 34
16
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 16 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
W
Camera Characteristics
1
• Features a 23.6×15.8 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 12.4 million effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures with minimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.
• Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera, with a magnification of approximately 0.85 and field of view of approximately 96%, for easier image composition and manual focusing.
Also features a superimpose function in which the active AF point(s) on the viewfinder illuminate red.
• Features a large 3.0-inch monitor with approximately 921,000 dots, a wide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions for high-precision viewing performance.
• In addition to the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109, the commercially available AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries or AA alkaline batteries can also be used with the optional AA battery holder D-BH109.
• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject in real-time on the monitor.
• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the lens properties. The camera can also output a composite video signal so that you can view recorded images and movies on a monitor such as a TV screen.
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of the camera. The large text size, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use menus make the camera easier to operate.
• The CMOS sensor features a special SP coating to prevent dust sticking to the sensor. The Dust Removal function also shakes the CMOS sensor for removing collected dust.
• Features Digital Filters to internally process the image in the camera.
You can use digital filters such as Color or Soft while taking pictures or to process images after taking them.
• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while previewing the end result of the edited image, enabling a wider range of expression.
• Records images in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record in both formats simultaneously. Pictures taken in RAW format can be easily processed internally by the camera.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 17 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Features Sensitivity Priority mode K that automatically adjusts aperture and shutter speed according to the set sensitivity.
• Supports infrared transmission (IrSimple/IrSS) which allows you to send and receive image data to and from cell phones and printers.
Shake Reduction (SR)
Shake Reduction (SR) on the W features a PENTAX original system which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high speeds, compensating for camera shake.
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken, such as when changing the composition of a picture. This is normal and not a malfunction.
17
1
Additionally Saving as a RAW Image
When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory, you can additionally save the image in RAW format by pressing the m c button during playback.
If the image was shot using any of the following settings, the corresponding RAW image listed is saved.
• Cross Processing RAW image without Cross Processing
• Digital Filter
• HDR Capture
• Multi-exposure
RAW image without filter effect
RAW image with standard exposure
RAW image with Multi-exposure
The captured area (view angle) will differ between the W and 35 mm SLR cameras even if the same lens is used because the format sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor are different.
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor
35 mm film: 36×24 mm
W CMOS sensor: 23.6×15.8 mm
The focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera is about 1.5 times longer than that of the W . To shoot images with an angle of view framing the same area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm camera
150÷1.5=100
Use a 100 mm lens with the W .
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with the W by 1.5 to determine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with the W
300×1.5=450
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.
18
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 18 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Checking the Contents of the
Package
1
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.
Check that all accessories are included.
Hot shoe cover F
K
(Installed on camera)
Eyecup F
Q
(Installed on camera)
Body mount cover
(Installed on camera)
USB cable
I-USB7
Strap
O-ST53
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109
Battery charger
D-BC109
AC plug cord Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW110
Operating Manual
(this manual)
Refer to p.320 for information on optional accessories.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 19 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Names and Functions of Working
Parts
AF assist light
Self-timer lamp/
Remote control receiver
Card cover
Lens mount index
(red dot)
Lens unlock button
Built-in flash
Image plane indicator
PC/AV terminal
19
Hot shoe
Speaker
Strap lug
Microphone
Mirror
AF coupler
Lens information contacts
Diopter adjustment lever
Viewfinder
1
Card access lamp
Terminal cover Monitor
Infrared port
Tripod socket
Battery cover unlock lever
Battery cover
* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Eyecup F
Q
removed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 20 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
20
1
Capture Mode
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.
The factory default settings are explained here. Depending on the button, these settings can be changed.
1
2
3
5
6
4
8
7
9
0 a b c d e f
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 21 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
1 | (Green) button
You can assign a function to
2 Shutter release button
Press to capture images.
3 Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
4 Lens unlock button
Press to detach a lens. (p.57)
5 m c button
Sets the EV compensation
6 Mode dial
7 Focus mode lever
Switches between autofocus
8 K / i button
Press to pop up the built-in
9 E-dial
Sets the shutter speed, aperture, sensitivity and EV compensation values.
0 = / L button
You can select the function of this button either to focus on the target or to lock the
exposure value. (p.112, p.120,
21 a Q button
Switches to Playback mode.
b U button
Displays a Live View image.
c M button
Displays the status screen
Switches to the control panel when the status screen is
d 4 button
When the control panel or a menu screen is displayed, press this button to confirm the selected item.
When the focusing area is set to S (Select), press this button to enable or disable
changing the AF point. (p.129)
e Four-way controller
( 2345 )
Displays the Drive Mode/
Flash Mode/White Balance/
Sensitivity setup menu. (p.86)
When the control panel or a menu screen is displayed, use this to move the cursor or change items.
Changes the AF point when it can be changed.
f 3 button
Displays the [ A Rec. Mode 1]
four-way controller ( 5 ) to display other menus.
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 22 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
22
1
Playback Mode
Functions of buttons, dial and lever used during playback are noted.
1 4
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0 a
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 23 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
1 | (Green) button
Press to change the settings, such as resetting the values.
2 Shutter release button
Press halfway to switch to
Capture mode.
3 Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
4 m c button
When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory, press this button to additionally save the
5 K / i button
Press to delete images. (p.84)
6 E-dial
Use this to enlarge an image
images at the same time
23
7 Q button
Switches to Capture mode.
8 M button
Displays shooting information
9 4 button
Confirms the setting you selected in the menu or playback screen.
0 Four-way controller
( 2345 )
Use this to move the cursor or change items in the menu or playback screen.
Press the four-way controller
( 3 ) to display the playback
a 3 button
Displays the [ Q Playback 1]
four-way controller ( 5 ) to display other menus.
1
References to Button Names
In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the fourway controller are referred to in the following way.
24
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 24 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Display Indicators
1
Monitor
The various information appears on the monitor depending on the status of the camera.
Monitor
The brightness and the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.277, p.278)
At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when the camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.
1
P Program
Automatic Exposure
P
2
09/09/2010 10:30AM
3
1
2
(only when set to Destination)
3
To not show guides, set [Guide Display] to [Off] in the [
R Set-up 1] menu.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 25 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
25
Capture Mode
While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current shooting function settings. You can change the type of the screen displayed by pressing the M button.
P
ISO
AUTO
1/ 125
200
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AF.A
AWB
F 5.6
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[
Status screen
37 ]
M
Custom Image
Bright
HDR
OFF
JPEG
AF.A
12
M
[
Control panel
37 ]
M
Blank
M
1
Status screen
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)
P
SHIFT
1/ 2000
ISO
AUTO
1600
AWB
-3 2 1
±1.0
JPEG 12
M
1 2 +3
G1A1
AF.A
F
2.8
[
ISO
37 ]
1
2
3
Interval Shooting (p.149)/Multi-
exposure (p.153)/Digital Filter
4
5
6
7
8 E-dial guide
9 Shutter speed
10 Aperture value
11 ISO AUTO
12
8
1 2
9
3 4
8
5 6 7
10
11 12
17
14
18 19 20
21
15 16
22 23 24 25 26
13
14 EV bar
15
Flash Exposure Compensation (p.81)
16
White Balance fine-tuning (p.204)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26 Remaining image storage capacity/ | button guide
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 26 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
26
Control panel
Press the M button in the status screen to display the control panel and change settings.
1
Custom Image
Bright
HDR
OFF
AF.A
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
1 Function name
2 Setting
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
8
13
1
2
4
9
14
18
5
10
15
6
11
16
19
7
12
17
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
18 Current date and time
19 Remaining image storage capacity
• Settings that cannot be changed due to the current camera setup cannot be selected.
• On the status screen, the setting currently being changed or guide display for the buttons that can be operated are displayed in blue (when [Status Screen] in the [ R Set-up 1] menu is set to [Display Color 1]).
• The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds.
Press the M button to display it again.
• If no operations are made within 30 seconds in the control panel, the status screen will reappear.
• If [Shooting Info Display] is set to O
(On) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [
A Rec.
Mode 4] menu and the blank screen is selected, the next time the camera is turned on the blank screen is displayed first.
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed on the status screen and in the control panel. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more, [9999] is displayed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 27 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
27
Playback Mode
The camera switches the types of information display when you press the
M button during playback.
Standard
Histogram display
Detailed information display
No info. display
Captured image, file format and guides are displayed.
Captured image and histogram (Brightness/RGB) are
displayed. Not available during movie playback. (p.30)
Detailed information on how and when the image was
Only captured image is displayed.
1
M
JPEG 1/ 2000 F5.6
ISO 200
Standard
M
JPEG 1/ 2000 F5.6
ISO 200
Histogram display
M
P 100-0001
M
AF.A
1/ 2000
F5.6
ISO 200
24mm
DR
200
+1.5
-0.5
G2 A1
JPEG 12
M AdobeRGB
09/09/2010 10:00AM
± 0
± 0
± 0
± 0
± 0
Detailed information display No info. display
The type of information display that is shown first during playback is the same as that of the last playback in the previous session. If [Playback Info Display] is set to P
(Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [
A Rec. Mode 4] menu, the [Standard] screen is always displayed first when the camera is turned on.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 28 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
28
1
Detailed information display
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to switch between pages.
Page 1
Still Picture
P 100-0001
AF.A
1/ 2000
F2.8
ISO 200
JPEG 12
M
24mm
DR
200
+1.5
-0.5
G2 A1
AdobeRGB
09/09/2010 10:00AM
± 0
± 0
± 0
± 0
± 0
1
2
3
6
10 11
12 13 14 15
8
7
19
22
20
23
16
4
9
17
21
24
18
25 26 27 28 29
32 33
5
30
31
Movie
MONO
F2.8
100-0001
10min10sec
G2 A1
Movie
09/09/2010 10:00AM
± 0
± 0
± 0
± 0
± 0
3 4
2
34
35 36
19 37
25 26
32
27
23
13 38
24
29
5
30
31
Page 2
Still Picture/Movie
2
3
100-0001
1
2
2
3
4 5
39
39
40
41
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 29 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
29
1
2 Captured image
3
4
5 Folder number-File number
6
10
7
8 Lens focal length
9
11
12 Shutter speed
13
14
15
16
17
18 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
19 Aperture value
20
21 Flash Exposure Compensation
22
23
24
White Balance fine-tuning (p.204)
25
26
Recorded Pixels (p.165, p.192)
27
28
29
Shake Reduction (p.141, p.166)
30
31
Custom Image parameters (p.213)
32 Shooting date and time
33
34 Recording time
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Drive Mode (Remote Control)
Information tampering warning
* For images taken with Live View, the autofocus method is displayed for indicator
9.
* Indicators 7 and 21 appear only for images taken with the flash.
* Indicators 13, 14, 15, 16, and 24 appear only for images taken with the corresponding functions enabled.
* Indicators 26 and 27 do not appear for RAW images.
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 30 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
30
1
Histogram Display
The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Press the four-way controller ( 23 ) to switch between “Brightness histogram” and “RGB histogram”.
1 2 3 2 3
4 23
11
5
1/ 2000 F5.6
ISO 200
6 7 8 9
Brightness histogram
1 0
23
5
1
1/ 2000 F5.6
ISO 200
6 7 8 9 1 0
RGB histogram
1 Histogram (Brightness)
2 Protect
3 Folder number-File number
7 Shutter speed
8 Aperture value
9 Sensitivity
4 Additionally saving in RAW format 10 DPOF Setting
5
6
Switch RGB histogram/ Brightness histogram
File Format
11 Histogram (R)
12 Histogram (G)
13 Histogram (B)
* Indicator 2 appears only for protected images.
* Indicator 4 appears only when the file format of the last captured image is
JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory. (p.83)
1 2
13
If [Bright/Dark Area] (p.222) of the [
Q Playback 1] menu is set to O (On), areas affected by bright or dark portions blink (except when in RGB histogram display and Detailed information display).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 31 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
31
Using the Histogram
A histogram shows the brightness distribution of an image. The horizontal axis represents brightness (dark at the left and bright at the right) and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels.
The shape and the distribution of the histogram before and after shooting tells you whether the exposure level and contrast are correct or not, and lets you decide if you need to adjust the exposure and take a picture again.
1
Adjusting the Exposure (p.117)
1
(Dark) ← →
Dark portions
(Bright)
Bright portions
Understanding Brightness
When the brightness is correct and there are no overly bright or dark areas, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak is on the left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.
1
Dark image Image with few bright or dark areas
Bright image
When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions with no detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off
(bright portions with no detail).
Bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow on the monitor when [Bright/Dark Area] is O (On).
1
1
Setting the Playback Display Method (p.222)
1
Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.276)
Understanding Color Balance
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB histogram.
The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have White Balance adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that color is too intense.
1
Setting the White Balance (p.200)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 32 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
32
1
Guide Indicators
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys, buttons and e-dial that can be operated at that time.
Example)
2 Four-way controller ( 2 )
3 Four-way controller ( 3 )
4 Four-way controller ( 4 )
5 Four-way controller ( 5 )
4 button
S E-dial
Shutter release button
3 button
M button
= / L button
| Green button m m c button
K / i button
Viewfinder
The following information appears in the viewfinder.
2 3
1 1
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
1
2
3
4
Lit: when flash is available.
Blinks: when flash is recommended but not set.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 33 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
5
The icon for Picture mode in use appears.
U (Normal mode of I ), = (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro),
\ (Moving Object), .
(Night Scene Portrait)
6
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
7 Shutter speed
Shutter speed when capturing or adjusting.
Underlined when the shutter speed can be adjusted with the e-dial.
A countdown of processing time is displayed when the Noise Reduction
function is activated. (p.100)
8 Aperture value
Aperture value when capturing or adjusting.
Underlined when the aperture value can be adjusted with the e-dial.
[ nr
] blinks when the Noise Reduction function is activated. (p.100)
9
Lit: when the subject is focused.
Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.
10 Number of recordable images/EV compensation value
Displays the number of recordable images with current quality level and recorded pixels.
The difference from the proper exposure value appears when the mode dial is set to a
m
Underlined when the EV compensation value can be adjusted with the e-dial while the m c button is pressed.
o : Sensitivity
Underlined when the sensitivity can be adjusted with the e-dial.
11
Appears when set to \ .
12
Appears while the AE Lock function is activated.
• The AF point(s) in use for autofocus appear in red (Superimpose AF Area)
when the shutter release button is pressed halfway. (p.129)
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed in the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more,
[9999] is displayed.
• When [AF/AE-L Button] is set to [Cancel AF] in the [
A Rec. Mode 4] menu,
\ is displayed in the viewfinder while the = / L button is pressed.
33
1
34
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 34 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
How to Change Function Settings
1
Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, control panel or menus.
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.
Using the Direct Keys
In Capture mode, you can set Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance and Sensitivity by pressing the four-way controller ( 2345
Below, how to set [Flash Mode] is explained as an example.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select a flash mode.
Flash Mode
Auto Flash Discharge
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
MENU Cancel
0.0
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 35 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
When direct key operation is enabled, the guide indicators for the direct keys are displayed in the status screen. Direct key operation is not available when the AF point is being changed while the focusing area is set to S (Select). In such cases, press and hold the 4
Using the Control Panel
While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.
You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.
Below, how to set [JPEG Quality] is explained as an example.
1
Check the status screen and then press the M button.
The control panel appears.
1
35
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
AUTO
PICT
1/ 20
ISO
AUTO
800
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 5.6
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select an item you want to change the setting for.
You cannot select items that cannot be changed.
Custom Image
Bright
AF.A
JPEG 12
M
HDR
OFF
[ 37 ]
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 36 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
36
3
Press the 4 button.
The setup screen of the selected item appears.
1
JPEG Quality
JPEG
AF.A
12
M
HDR
OFF
[ 37 ]
4
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) or e-dial to select a setting value.
JPEG Quality 128
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel and is ready to take a picture.
• You can also change the setting by turning the e-dial after selecting the item you want to change in Step 2. Detailed settings such as parameters can be changed after pressing the 4 button.
• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View
(p.159) is displayed. Make or change necessary settings in the [
A Rec.
Mode] menu in advance.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 37 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using the Menus
This section explains how to use the menus: [ A Rec. Mode],
[ Q Playback], [ R Set-up] and [ A Custom Setting] menus.
Below, how to set [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [ A Rec. Mode 2] menu is explained as an example.
1
Press the 3 button in
Capture mode.
The [ A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on the monitor.
If the 3 button is pressed in
Playback mode, the [ Q Playback 1] menu appears. When the mode dial is set to H (Scene), the [ H Scene] menu appears instead.
2
Press the four-way controller
( 5 ).
Each time the four-way controller ( 5 ) is pressed, the menu will change in the following sequence: [ A Rec. Mode 2],
[ A Rec. Mode 3], [ A Rec. Mode 4],
[ Q Playback 1] ··· [ A Rec. Mode 1].
You can also use the e-dial to switch the menus.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to choose an item.
1 2 3 4
Custom Image
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AF Mode
AE Metering
Select AF Point
MENU Exit
JPEG
12
M
AF.A
1 2 3 4
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU Exit
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
AUTO
1
37
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 38 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
38
1
4
Press the four-way controller
( 5 ).
Available settings are displayed.
The frame moves to the pop-up menu if there is one. When there is a submenu, it is displayed.
1 2 3 4
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU Exit
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
AUTO
5
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select a setting.
1 2 3 4
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU Cancel
NR
AUTO
ISO
NR
NR
OFF
OK OK
6
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Press the 3 button if a submenu is displayed.
Next, set other items.
7
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, your settings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as by removing the battery while the camera is on).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 39 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
39
• You can select whether to display the menu tab selected the last time first, or to always display the [ A
Rec. Mode 1] menu first. (p.275)
• Refer to the following pages for details on each menu.
• [ A Rec. Mode] menu 1
• [ Q Playback] menu 1
• [ R Set-up] menu 1
• [ A Custom Setting] menu 1
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 40 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
40
Memo
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 41 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Getting Started
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the instructions.
Attaching the Strap ..............................................42
Inserting the Battery ............................................ 43
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card .......... 52
Attaching a Lens .................................................. 56
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter .......................58
Turning the Camera On and Off .......................... 59
Initial Settings ....................................................... 60
42
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 42 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Attaching the Strap
2
1
Pass the end of the strap through the strap lug, then secure it on the inside of the clasp.
2
Attach the other end of the strap in the same manner as described above.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 43 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Inserting the Battery
Insert the lithium-ion battery or AA batteries into the camera.
Using the Lithium-ion Battery
Use the exclusive battery D-LI109.
Charging the Battery
When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not been used in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge the battery.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
2
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
Indicator lamp
2
43
AC plug cord
Battery charger
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 44 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
44
2
3
Face the 2 mark on the exclusive battery up and insert it into the battery charger.
First, insert the battery at an angle, as shown in the illustration, and then push down on the battery until it clicks.
The indicator lamp is lit during charging and turns off when the battery is fully charged.
4
When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from the battery charger.
• Do not use the provided Battery Charger D-BC109 to charge batteries other than rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109. Charging other batteries may cause damage or heating.
• If the battery is correctly oriented and inserted into the battery charger but the indicator lamp is not lit, the battery is faulty. Use a new battery in the camera.
• The maximum charging time is approximately 240 minutes (it depends on temperature and remaining battery power). Charge in a location where the temperature is between 0°C and 40°C.
• If battery usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery has reached the end of its life. Use a new battery in the camera.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 45 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Inserting/Removing the Battery
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The battery may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you install a new battery after a long time has passed since the battery was removed, follow the
procedure for “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may not be removed. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth before inserting.
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is used continuously for a long period of time.
1
Slide the battery cover unlock lever in the direction of the arrow
( 1 ) to open the battery cover
( 2 ).
2
1
2
45
2
Face the 2 mark on the battery towards outside of the camera, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow ( 3 ) and insert the battery.
To remove the battery, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow ( 3 ) with your finger. Remove the battery when it pops out slightly.
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 46 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
46
3
Close the battery cover.
2
Using the AA Batteries
When using AA batteries, be sure to use the optional AA battery holder
Use four AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries, or AA alkaline batteries.
Available Batteries Characteristics
AA lithium batteries Recommended when using the camera in cold climates.
AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries
AA alkaline batteries
These are rechargeable and are economical.
A commercially available battery charger that is compatible with the batteries is required.
These are easily obtainable when the batteries you are using run out but they may not support all the camera functions under certain conditions. We do not recommend using them except in emergencies or when checking the camera functionality.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 47 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Do not use the Ni-Mn batteries as the batteries’ voltage characteristics may cause a malfunction.
• AA lithium batteries and AA alkaline batteries that can be used in this camera are not rechargeable.
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the batteries while the power is on.
• Remove the batteries when you do not plan to use the camera for a long time.
If you leave them in the camera for a long time, they may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you install new batteries after a long time has passed since the batteries were removed, follow the
procedure for “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).
• Insert the batteries correctly. Batteries inserted incorrectly may cause a camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the batteries before inserting.
• Replace all the batteries at the same time and do not mix battery types, brands or old batteries with new ones. Otherwise, malfunctions, such as the battery level not being displayed properly, may occur.
1
Insert the AA batteries according to the +/– indicators in the battery holder.
2
47
2
Slide the battery cover unlock lever in the direction of the arrow
( 1 ) to open the battery cover
( 2 ).
2
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 48 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
48
2
3
Insert the battery holder into the battery chamber.
Push the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow ( 3 ) and insert the battery holder until it locks.
To remove the battery holder, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow ( 3 ) with your finger. Remove the battery holder when it pops out slightly.
4
Close the battery cover.
3
• To use the AA batteries, set the AA battery type in [AA Battery Type] of the
[ R
Set-up 3] menu before use. (p.282)
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when using
the camera for a prolonged period. (p.50)
• Check the orientation of the batteries if the camera does not operate properly.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 49 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
49
Battery Level Indicator
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w displayed on the status screen.
Status Screen w (Green) x (Green) f (Orange) y (Yellow) z (Red)
[Battery depleted]
Battery Level
Battery is full.
Battery is close to full. (D-LI109 only)
Battery is running low. (D-BH109 only)
Battery is running low. (D-LI109 only)
Battery is almost empty.
The camera turns off after displaying the message.
2 f , y or z (Red) may appear even when the battery level is sufficient if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing continuous shooting for a long period of time. In this situation, turn the camera off and on again. If w (Green) appears, you can use the camera.
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback
Time (Fully Charged Battery/New AA Batteries)
Battery
D-LI109
Temperature
23°C
0°C
Normal
Recording
Flash Photography
50% Use 100% Use
Playback
Time
560 images 470 images 400 images 300 minutes
420 images 340 images 280 images 240 minutes
1600 images
1000 images
890 images
620 minutes
AA lithium batteries
AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries
(1900mAh)
AA alkaline batteries
23°C
23°C 610 images 400 images 300 images
330 minutes
23°C 200 images 120 images 90 images
270 minutes
The image storage capacity (normal recording and flash use 50%) is based on measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data is based on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.
50
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 50 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries at hand and keep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normal when returned to room temperature.
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold climates, or taking a lot of pictures.
2
Using the AC Adapter (Optional)
We recommend the use of the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when using the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to a computer or AV device.
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.
2
Open the battery cover.
Remove the battery if it is inserted into the camera.
2
1
3
Insert the DC coupler into the battery chamber.
Push the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow ( 1 ) and insert the
DC coupler until it locks.
To remove the DC coupler, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow ( 1 ) with your finger. Remove the
DC coupler when it pops out slightly.
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 51 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Close the battery cover.
The DC coupler’s connection cable is pulled out from the battery cover.
5
Connect the DC terminals on the AC adapter and the DC coupler with the 2 marks aligned.
2
7
5
6
6
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.
7
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the
AC adapter.
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Card or data may be corrupted if disconnected while the card is being accessed.
• The connection cable will protrude from the battery cover while the AC adapter is in use. Be careful as you will not be able to set the camera upright on a table, etc.
Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit K-AC109 when using the AC adapter.
51
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 52 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
52
2
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory
Card
This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card
(commercially available). Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards hereafter. Make sure the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.
• If the card cover is opened while the power is on, the camera will turn off. Do not open the cover while the camera is in use.
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting an
SD Memory Card” (p.268) for details on formatting.
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If a write speed cannot keep up with a recording speed, the writing may stop during recording.
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.
2
Slide the card cover in the direction of the arrow and then lift it to open ( 1
→
).
1
2
3
Insert the card all the way with the SD Memory Card label facing toward the monitor.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 53 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Push the SD Memory Card in once to remove.
4
Close the card cover ( 3 ) and then slide it in the direction of the arrow ( 4 ).
4
3
Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a write-protect switch. Setting the switch to
LOCK prevents new data from being recorded on the card, the stored data from being deleted, and the card from being formatted by the camera or computer.
Write-protect switch
• The SD Memory Card may be hot when removing the card immediately after using the camera.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the power while the card is being accessed. This may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away from water and store away from high temperatures.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be damaged and become unusable.
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.
We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted if
(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
(2) the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
(3) the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
(4) the SD Memory Card or the battery is removed while the card is being accessed.
2
53
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 54 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
54
2
• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards used with other cameras.
1
Formatting an SD Memory Card (p.268)
• The data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own risk.
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
When the File Format is JPEG
Choose the number of recorded pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG data compression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use the pictures you have taken.
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more stars ( E ) are clearer when printed. However, the number of pictures that can be taken (the number of pictures that can be recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases with larger file sizes.
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of other factors so you do not need to select more than the required number of pixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1728×1152) is adequate. Set the appropriate recorded pixels and quality level depending on how the picture will be used.
1
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.192)
1
Setting the JPEG Quality Level (p.193)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 55 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image
Storage Capacity
(When using a 2 GB SD Memory Card)
JPEG Quality
JPEG Rec. Pixels
E (4288×2848)
J (3936×2624)
P (3072×2048) i (1728×1152)
C
Best
281
332
543
1617
D
Better
495
585
945
2793
E
Good
975
1138
1807
5121
• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions, shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are divided into folders containing 500 images each. However, in Exposure
Bracketing, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the number of images exceeds 500.
55
2
When the File Format is RAW
With the W , you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select
PENTAX’s original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative) format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 2 GB SD Memory Card, you can record up to 98 images in both PEF and DNG formats.
1
Setting the File Format (p.195)
56
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 56 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Attaching a Lens
2
Attach a proper lens to the camera’s body.
When you use one of the following lenses with the W , all the camera’s capture modes will be available.
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses
(b) Lenses with an s (Auto) position, when used in the s position
Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent unexpected lens movement.
• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s , some
functions will be restricted. Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]”
• With factory default settings, the camera will not work with lenses other than
those listed above and accessories. Set [22. Using Aperture Ring] to
[Permitted] in the [ A
Custom Setting 4] menu to use them. (p.314)
1
Check that the camera is turned off.
2
Remove the body mount cover
( 1 ) and lens mount cover ( 2 ).
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens mount side facing upward to protect the lens mount from damage.
3
Align the Lens mount index (red dots: 3 ) on the camera and the lens, and secure by turning the lens clockwise until it clicks.
After attaching, turn the lens counterclockwise to check that the lens is locked in place.
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 57 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Remove the front lens cap by pushing the indicated portions inward.
To detach the lens, hold down the lens unlock button ( 4 ) and turn the lens counterclockwise.
4
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts and an AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.
The body mount cover ( 1 ) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust when shipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function.
2
57
58
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 58 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
2
Adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter adjustment lever sideways.
You can adjust the diopter from approximately –2.5 to +1.5 m –1 .
1
Look through the viewfinder and slide the diopter adjustment lever left or right.
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the viewfinder is focused.
Point the camera at a white wall or other bright and consistent surface.
AF frame
• The Eyecup F
Q
is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves the factory. Diopter can be adjusted with the Eyecup F
Q
attached. However, adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.
• To remove the Eyecup F
Q
, pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
To attach the Eyecup F
Q
, align it with the groove on the viewfinder eyepiece and push it into the position.
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly even if you use the diopter adjustment lever, use the optional diopter correction lens adapter M. However, the
Eyecup F
Q
must be removed to use this
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 59 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Turning the Camera On and Off
1
Turn the main switch to [ON].
The camera will turn on.
Set the main switch to the position [OFF] to turn off the camera.
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera, turn it on again or perform any of the following.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
- Press the Q button, 3 button, or M button.
• By default, the camera is set to turn off automatically after 1 minute of inactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] of the [ R Set-up 3]
59
2
60
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 60 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Initial Settings
2
The first time the camera is turned on after purchasing, the [Language/ u ] screen appears on the monitor. Follow the procedure below to set the language displayed on the monitor and the current date and time. Once these settings are made, you will not need to set them again next time you turn on your camera.
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set the date and time by following the procedure
in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).
MENU Cancel OK OK
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
01 / 01 / 2010
24h
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
Setting the Display Language
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc. are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
1
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select the desired language.
MENU Cancel OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 61 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the selected language.
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) twice
and proceed to Step 10 on p.62 if
W (Hometown) does not have to be changed.
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The cursor moves to W .
4
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [ W Hometown] screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select a city.
Initial Setting
English
New York
Text Size Standard
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
Hometown
61
2
New York
DST
MENU Cancel
6
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).
7
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
8
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.
9
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The cursor moves to [Text Size].
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 62 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
62
2
10
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Standard] or
[Large].
Selecting [Large] increases the text size of the selected menu items.
Initial Setting
English
New York
Text Size Standard
Large
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
11
Press the 4 button.
12
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) to select [Settings complete].
Initial Setting
English
New York
Text Size Standard
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
13
Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set to [Standard].
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 63 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
When the Wrong Language is Set
If you mistakenly select the wrong language in the [Language/ u ] screen and proceed to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can perform the following operation to set the language back.
If you have proceeded to switch the camera to Capture mode (and the camera is ready to take a picture), perform the following operation from
Step 2 to set the language back.
1
Press the 3 button once to display the guides on the monitor.
P ࡊࡠࠣࡓ⥄േ㔺
The screen shown on the right is an example of the guides displayed. The displayed screen will vary depending on the selected language.
P
The guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds.
2
Press the 3 button once.
2010/01/01 00:00
[ A 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
H is displayed when the mode dial is set to H .
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) five times.
[ R 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) six times when the mode dial is set to
H .
4
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) to select [Language/ u ].
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Language/ u ] screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select the desired language and press the 4 button.
The [ R Set-up 1] menu in the selected language appears.
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown] and the current date and time as necessary.
• To change the hometown: “Setting the World Time” (p.270)
• To change the date and time: “Changing the Date and Time Display”
• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting] screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed again next time the camera is turned on.
• If you have not proceeded to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can reselect a language using the four-way controller ( 5 ) in the [Language/ u ] screen.
2
63
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 64 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
64
2
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time and the display style.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].
2
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to choose the date format.
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/ mm/dd].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
01 / 01 / 2010
24h
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to [24h].
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select 24h (24-hour display) or 12h (12-hour display).
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
/ / /
01 / 01 / 2010
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame returns to [Date Format].
6
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The frame moves to [Date].
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 65 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
7
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The frame moves to the month.
8
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the month.
Set the day and year in the same manner.
Next, set the time.
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the camera switches between am and pm depending on the time.
9
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) to select [Settings complete].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
/
01 / 01 / 2010
24h
Time
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
/ /
09 / 09 / 2010
24h
Settings complete
MENU Cancel OK OK
10
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.
If you set the date and time from the menu, the screen will return to the
[ R Set-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.
Pressing the 3 button while setting the date and time cancels the settings made up to that point and switches the camera to Capture mode. After initial settings are complete, if the camera power is turned off before the date and time settings are complete, the [Date Adjustment] screen will appear first next time you turn the camera on. In this case, you can also set the date and time
65
2
• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the seconds value is set to 0. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 0 seconds.
• You can change the language and date and time settings from the menu.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 66 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
66
Memo
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 67 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Basic Operations
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by setting mode dial to
I
(Auto Picture) to ensure successful capturing.
For information about advanced functions and settings for taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.
Basic Shooting Operation ................................... 68
Using a Zoom Lens ..............................................74
Using the Built-in Flash ....................................... 75
Playing Back Pictures ..........................................82
68
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 68 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Basic Shooting Operation
3
Holding the Camera
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands and keep your elbows close to your body.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.
Horizontal position Vertical position
• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object such as a table, tree, or wall.
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the slowest possible shutter speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length
×1.5). For example, it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/
150 of a second for 100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function
(p.141) when using a slower shutter speed.
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight of the camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 69 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings
The W features various capture modes, focus modes, and drive modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.
1
Set the mode dial to I .
The camera will select the optimal capture mode for the subject.
1
Selecting the Appropriate Capture
3
69
2
Set the focus mode lever to = .
The focus mode changes to =
(Autofocus) mode.
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway in = , the camera
focuses automatically. (p.122)
3
Look through the viewfinder to view the subject.
A zoom lens can be used to change the size of the subject in the viewfinder.
MF
AF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 70 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
70
3
4
Position the subject inside the
AF frame and press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject comes into focus.
When set to I (Auto Picture) mode, the optimal capture mode is automatically selected from U (Standard),
= (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro),
\ (Moving Object) or .
(Night Scene
Portrait).
The built-in flash pops up automatically when necessary.
1
Operating the shutter release button
1
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
Flash status
1
Using the Built-in Flash (p.75)
1
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point) (p.129)
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
This action is referred to as "releasing the shutter" or "release".
Focus indicator
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 71 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
6
Review the captured image on the monitor.
The image appears for 1 second on the monitor shortly after capturing (Instant
Review).
1
Setting the Display for Instant
You can magnify the image during Instant
Review with the e-dial. (p.223)
You can delete the image during Instant
Review by pressing the K / i button.
1
Deleting a Single Image (p.84)
• You can set the camera so that pressing the = / L button will focus automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button
• You can preview the image in the viewfinder or on the monitor and check the
composition, exposure, and focus before taking pictures. (p.137)
71
3
72
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 72 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Operating the shutter release button
The shutter release button has two working positions.
3
Not pressed Pressed halfway
(first position)
Pressed fully
(second position)
Pressing it down halfway (first position) displays the indicators in the viewfinder and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it fully
(second position) takes a picture.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent camera shake.
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn where the first position and second position are.
• The viewfinder indicators are displayed while the shutter release button is pressed halfway. The indicators are displayed for about 10 seconds
(default setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after you take
your finger off the button. (p.32, p.116)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 73 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
73
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult when taking pictures under the following conditions. These also apply to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.
(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in the focusing area
(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusing area
(c) Fast moving objects
(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright background)
(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within the focusing area
(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within the focusing area
If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus mode lever to \ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject
with the aid of the matte field in the viewfinder. (p.135)
The subject may not be focused even when the ] (focus indicator) is displayed when (e) and (f) above apply.
3
74
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 74 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using a Zoom Lens
3
Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) with a zoom lens. Adjust the subject to the desired size and take pictures.
1
Turn the zoom ring to the right or left.
Turn the zoom ring clockwise for telephoto and counterclockwise for wide angle.
MF
AF
Wide Angle Telephoto
• The smaller the number displayed for the focal length, the wider the angle.
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.
• Power Zoom functions (Image Size Tracking, Zoom Clip, and Auto Zoom
Effect) are not compatible with this camera.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 75 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using the Built-in Flash
75
Use the following procedures to take pictures in low light or backlit conditions and when you want to use the built-in flash.
The built-in flash is optimum for a subject at a distance from 0.7 m to 5 m.
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of the corners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on the
lens being used and the set sensitivity (p.178)).
Compatibility of built-in flash and lens
Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the capture conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to check the compatibility.
1
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash (p.179)
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set the lens aperture ring to s (Auto).
3
For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an
external flash, refer to the “Using the Flash” (p.173).
Setting the Flash Mode
C
Flash Mode
Auto Flash
Discharge b i
Manual Flash
Discharge
Auto Flash+Redeye Reduction
Function
The camera automatically measures the ambient light and determines whether to use the flash. The flash pops up and discharges automatically when necessary, such as when using a shutter speed which is likely to cause camera shake or in backlit conditions (except when in s (Landscape), \ (Moving Object) or l
(Night Snap) in H (Scene) mode). The flash may pop up but may not discharge if the camera determines that the flash is not necessary.
Discharges the flash manually. Discharges when the flash is popped up, does not discharge when retracted.
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the automatic flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 76 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
76
3
Flash Mode
D
Manual Flash+
Red-eye
Reduction
Function
Discharges the flash manually. A pre-flash for red-eye reduction is discharged before the main flash.
G Slow-speed Sync
H
Slow-speed Sync+
Red-eye
I k r
Trailing Curtain
Sync
Wireless Mode
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the brightness. For example, when using this to shoot a portrait with the sunset in the background, both the person and the background are captured beautifully.
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the main flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.
Discharges the flash immediately before closing the shutter curtain. Captures moving objects as if they are
leaving a trail behind. (p.176)
You can synchronize a dedicated external flash
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync cord.
The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the capture mode.
Capture Mode
I / = / s / q / \ / .
/ H
e / K / c b / a
C / b / i / D / r
E
E /
/ F
F /
/
Selectable Flash Mode
G k
/
/
H r
/ I / r
*1 This can be selected in Q (Surf & Snow), K (Food), l (Night Snap), R (Kids), and Y
(Pet) of H mode.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
The flash modes that can be selected for the set capture mode appear.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 77 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select a flash mode.
Turn the e-dial to perform the flash
Flash Mode
Auto Flash Discharge
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
MENU Cancel
0.0
OK OK
77
3
Using Auto Flash Discharge Mode C , i
(Automatic Flash Pop-up)
1
Set the mode dial to I , = , q , .
or H .
The flash is deactivated when A (Night Scene), K (Sunset), n (Stage
Lighting), Z (Night Scene HDR), U (Candlelight), or E (Museum) is selected in H (Scene) mode. The built-in flash does not pop up when set to l (Night Snap) in H (Scene) mode.
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The built-in flash pops up if necessary and begins charging. When the flash is fully charged, b appears in the
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 78 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
78
4
Push down on the portion indicated in the illustration to retract the built-in flash.
3
Switch between C (Auto Flash Discharge) and b (Manual Flash Discharge) by pressing the K / i button while the built-in flash is popped up.
Using Manual Flash Discharge Mode b , D
1
Press the K / i button.
The built-in flash pops up and begins charging. The b mode is used regardless of the flash mode setting.
When the flash is fully charged, b
appears in the viewfinder. (p.32)
2
Press the shutter release button fully.
The flash discharges and the picture is taken.
3
Push the built-in flash down to retract.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 79 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
When the mode dial is set to a (Flash Off), the built-in flash will not pop up even if the K / i button is pressed.
79
Using red-eye reduction flash
“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in photographs taken in dark environments with a flash. This is caused by the reflection of the electronic flash in the retina of the eye.
Red-eye occurs because pupils are dilated in dark environments.
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures can be used to combat it.
• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.
• Set to wide angle and move closer to the subject if a zoom lens is in use.
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible when using an external flash.
The red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces a red-eye effect by discharging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction function, the pre-flash is discharged just before the shutter is released. This reduces pupil dilation. The main flash is then discharged while the pupils are smaller, reducing the red-eye effect.
To use the red-eye reduction function in Picture mode or H (Scene) mode, select D or F . Set to F or H in other modes.
3
80
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 80 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Daylight-Sync Shooting
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait picture is taken with a shadow cast on a person’s face. Use of the flash in this way is called Daylight-Sync Shooting. The b (Manual
Flash Discharge) mode is used when shooting with Daylight-Sync
Shooting.
Taking pictures
1 Pop up the built-in flash manually and confirm that the flash mode is set to E
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.
3 Take a picture.
Without Daylight-Sync With Daylight-Sync
The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 81 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Compensating Flash Output
You can change the flash output in a range of –2.0 to +1.0. The following flash compensation values can be set according to the step interval set in
[1. EV Steps] (p.118) of the [
A Custom Setting 1] menu.
Step Interval
1/3 EV
1/2 EV
Flash Compensation Value
–2.0, –1.7, –1.3, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0
–2.0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0
1
Turn the e-dial in the [Flash Mode] screen.
The flash compensation value is displayed. Press the | button to reset the flash output compensation value to 0.0.
(Available only when [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the [ A
Flash Mode
Manual Flash Discharge
MENU Cancel
+0.3
OK OK
• When the flash output exceeds its maximum amount, the compensation will not be effective even if the compensation value is set to the plus (+) side.
• Compensating to the minus (–) side may not affect the image if the subject is too close, the aperture value is small or sensitivity is high.
• The flash output compensation is also effective for external flash units which support P-TTL auto flash mode.
3
81
Enabling Shooting while Charging the Flash
You can set the camera to enable shooting while the flash is being charged.
Set [16. Release While Charging] to [On]
in the [ A Custom Setting 3] menu
By default, pictures cannot be taken while the built-in flash is charging.
16.
Release While Charging
1
2
Off
On
Enables shutter release while the built-in flash is charging
MENU Cancel OK OK
82
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 82 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Playing Back Pictures
3
Playing Back Images
You can play back captured images with the camera.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to play back
pictures using a computer. Refer to “Using the Provided Software” (p.296) for
details on the software.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera enters Playback mode and the most recently captured image (image with the highest file number) is displayed on the monitor. (For movies, only the first frame is displayed on the monitor.)
Press the M button during playback to switch the information display such as shooting information for the displayed image.
Refer to p.27 for details about display
information.
2
Press the four-way controller
( 45 ).
4 : Displays the previous image.
5 : Displays the next image.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 83 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.219) for details on the playback mode
functions.
• When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory, you can additionally save the image in RAW format by pressing the m c button.
If the image was shot using any of the following settings, the corresponding
RAW image listed is saved.
• Multi-exposure
• Digital Filter
• HDR Capture
RAW image with Multi-exposure
RAW image without filter effect
RAW image with standard exposure
• Cross Processing RAW image without Cross Processing
83
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 84 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
84
3
Deleting a Single Image
You can delete images one by one.
• Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.240)
1
Press the Q button and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select an image to delete.
2
Press the K / i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
1
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Delete].
Select a file format to delete for images saved in RAW+ format.
Delete JPEG
Delete RAW
Delete
RAW+JPEG
Deletes only the JPEG image.
Deletes only the RAW image.
Deletes images in both file formats.
4
Press the 4 button.
The image is deleted.
Delete
Cancel
OK OK
When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 85 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Shooting Functions
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced shooting functions available with the
W
.
How to Operate the Shooting Functions ........... 86
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode .......... 91
Setting the Exposure ........................................... 96
Focusing ............................................................. 122
Checking the Composition, Exposure and
Focus Before Shooting (Preview) .....................137
Using the Shake Reduction Function to
Prevent Camera Shake ...................................... 141
Taking Pictures Continuously ..........................149
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters ................155
Shooting with Live View .................................... 159
Recording Movies .............................................. 165
86
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 86 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
How to Operate the Shooting
Functions
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control panel, [ A Rec. Mode] menu or [ A Custom Setting] menu.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.37).
4
Direct Keys Setting Items
Press the four-way controller ( 2345 ) in
Capture mode to set the following items.
Key
2
3
4
5
Item
Drive Mode
Flash Mode
White Balance
Sensitivity
Function
Selects Continuous shooting, Selftimer, Remote Control or Exposure
Bracketing shooting.
Page
Sets the method of flash discharge.
Adjusts the color balance to match the type of the light source illuminating the subject.
Sets the ISO sensitivity.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 87 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items
The following settings can be performed in the [ A Rec. Mode 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture mode to display the [ A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
87
Menu
A
A
1
2
Item
Custom Image
JPEG Recorded
Function
Sets the image finishing tone such as color and contrast before shooting an image.
Sets the file format.
Sets the recording size of images saved in
JPEG format.
Page
AF Mode
Cross
Processing
Sets the quality of images saved in JPEG format.
Selects the autofocus mode.
Selects the part of the viewfinder to use for measuring brightness and determining exposure.
Select AF Point
Selects the part of the viewfinder to focus on. p.129
HDR Capture
Changes the hues and contrast by performing digital cross processing.
Applies a digital filter effect when taking pictures.
Enables capturing images at high dynamic range.
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter
Speed NR
Creates a composite picture by taking multiple frames.
Takes pictures at a set interval from a set time.
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction when shooting with a high ISO sensitivity.
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction in slow speed shooting.
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 88 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
88
4
Menu
A
A
3
4
Item
Movie
Live View
Function
Sets the movie settings.
Sets the Live View display settings.
Instant Review Sets the Instant Review display settings.
Color Space
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
Memory
RAW File Format
Expands the dynamic range and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring.
Corrects distortions and chromatic aberrations of magnification occurring due to lens properties.
Sets the color space to use.
Sets the file format of images saved in RAW format.
Assigns the function to be called up when the
| button is pressed.
Assigns the function to be called up when the
= / L button is pressed.
Determines which settings to save when the power is turned off.
Shake
Reduction
Activates the Shake Reduction function.
Input Focal
Length
Sets the focal length when using a lens for which focal length information cannot be obtained.
*1 Can be set using the control panel.
Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 89 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
89
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items
Set the [ A Custom Setting 1-4] menus to fully use the functions of a SLR camera.
Menu
A
A
1
2
Item
1. EV Steps
2. Sensitivity Steps
Function
Sets the adjustment steps for exposure.
Sets the adjustment steps for ISO sensitivity.
Expands the lower and upper sensitivity limits.
3. Expanded
Sensitivity
4. Meter Operating
Time
5. AE-L with AF
Locked
Sets the exposure metering time.
6. Link AE to AF
Point
7. Auto Bracketing
Order
8. Superimpose AF
Area
9. AF.S Setting
10. AF.C Setting
11. AF Assist Light
12. WB When
Using Flash
13. AWB in
Tungsten Light
14. AF with Remote
Control
Sets whether to lock the exposure value when the focus is locked.
Sets whether to link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during multisegment metering.
Sets the order for Exposure Bracketing shooting.
Sets whether to display the selected AF point in the viewfinder.
Sets the action priority for when = mode is set to l and the shutter release button is fully pressed.
Sets the action priority for Continuous
Shooting when = mode is set to k .
Sets whether to use the AF assist light when autofocusing in dark locations.
Sets the white balance setting when using flash.
Sets whether to adjust the tungsten light color tone when the white balance is set to
F (Auto White Balance).
Sets whether to use autofocus when shooting with remote control.
Page
–
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 90 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
90
4
Menu
A
A
3
4
Item
15. Remote Control in Bulb
16. Release While
Charging
17. Flash in
Wireless Mode
18. Saving Rotation
Info
19. Save Menu
Location
20. Catch-in Focus
Function
Sets the remote control operation while using the remote control with the shutter speed set to h .
Sets whether to release shutter while the built-in flash is charging.
Sets the built-in flash discharge method in the wireless mode.
Sets whether to save rotation information when shooting.
Sets whether to save the last menu tab displayed on the monitor and to display it again next time the 3 button is pressed.
When set to [On], if [AF Mode] is set to f or l and a manual focus lens is attached, catch-in focus shooting is enabled and the shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into focus.
21. AF Fine
Adjustment
Adjusts the AF focusing position.
22. Using Aperture
Ring
Reset Custom
Functions
Sets whether to enable shutter release when the lens aperture ring is set to the position other than s .
Resets all the settings in the [ A Custom
Setting 1-4] menus to the defaults.
Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 91 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Selecting the Appropriate Capture
Mode
You can switch the capture modes by setting the icons on the mode dial to the dial indicator.
91
Dial indicator
The W features various shooting modes, enabling you to take pictures with settings suited for your photographic vision.
In this manual, the capture modes are referred to as follows.
Page Capture Mode
Picture modes
H (Scene) modes
Exposure modes
Movie mode
Mode
I (Auto Picture)/ = (Portrait)/ s (Landscape)/ q (Macro)/ \ (Moving Object)/ .
(Night Scene
Portrait)/ a (Flash Off) (When shooting with Live
View, d (Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be selected in I mode.)
A (Night Scene)/ Q (Surf & Snow)/ K (Food)/
K (Sunset)/ n (Stage Lighting)/ l (Night Snap)/
Z (Night Scene HDR)/ R (Kids)/ Y (Pet)/
U (Candlelight)/ E (Museum) e (Program)/ K (Sensitivity Priority)/ b (Shutter
Priority)/ c (Aperture Priority)/ a (Manual)
C (Movie)
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 92 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
92
4
Picture Modes
Set the mode dial to = , s , q , \ , .
or a if you cannot capture the desired image in I (Auto Picture) mode.
The characteristics of each mode are as follows.
Mode
I Auto Picture
= s q
\
.
Portrait
Landscape
Macro
Moving Object
Night Scene
Portrait a Flash Off
Characteristics
The optimal capture mode is automatically selected from the U (Standard), = (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro), \ (Moving Object) and .
(Night Scene
Portrait) modes. When shooting with Live View, d
(Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be selected.
Optimal for capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone.
Deepens the focus range, emphasizes contour and saturation of trees and the sky, and produces a vibrant image.
Lets you take vibrant pictures of flowers and other small subjects at short distances.
Lets you take sharp pictures of a quickly moving subject, such as at sporting events. The drive mode is fixed to g (Continuous Shooting (Hi)).
Lets you capture people against a night view or at dusk.
The flash is deactivated. Other settings are the same as U (Standard) in I .
In .
, even though the flash is used, the camera will use slow shutter speeds so the background areas beyond the flash’s reach will also appear correctly exposed in the picture ( 1
Slow-speed Sync (p.174)). To prevent camera
shake, either use the Shake Reduction function or mount the camera on a tripod.
When \ is automatically selected in I , pictures are taken in the drive mode set beforehand.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 93 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
93
H
Modes
By setting the mode dial to H (Scene), you can choose from the following 11 shooting scenes.
Mode
A Night Scene
Q Surf & Snow
K Food
K Sunset n Stage Lighting l Night Snap
Z Night Scene HDR
R Kids
Y Pet
U Candlelight
E Museum
Characteristics
Used for night scenes. Use a tripod, etc. to prevent shaking.
For capturing images of dazzling backgrounds, such as snowy mountains.
For capturing images of food. Saturation will be rather high to make it look appetizing.
For capturing sunrise or sunset in beautiful colors.
For capturing moving subjects in poorly lit place.
For taking snapshots in poorly lit place.
Captures 3 images to generate a single HDR image.
Exposure is optimized for dim lighting
For capturing moving kids. Reproduces healthy and bright skin tone. The drive mode is fixed to g
(Continuous Shooting (Hi)).
For capturing moving pets. The drive mode is fixed to g (Continuous Shooting (Hi)).
For capturing scenes in candlelight.
For capturing images in places where a flash is prohibited.
The flash is deactivated in A , K , n , Z , U and E . To prevent camera shake, either use the Shake Reduction function or mount the camera on a tripod.
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 94 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
94
4
Selecting a Shooting Scene
1
Set the mode dial to H .
The scene mode status screen appears.
2
Press the M button.
The icon for the currently selected shooting scene appears in the control panel.
1/ 15
ISO
AUTO
1600
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 4.0
ISO
[ 123 ] JPEG 12
M
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [Scene Mode] and press the 4 button.
The scene mode selection screen appears.
Scene Mode
Night Scene
JPEG
AF.A
12
M
HDR
OFF
[ 37 ]
4
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) or e-dial to choose a scene mode.
SCN
Used for night scenes.
Use a tripod, etc. to prevent shaking
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel and is ready to take a picture.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 95 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
95
When the 3 button is pressed while the mode dial is set to H (Scene), the [ H
Scene] menu appears. Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) to display the scene mode selection screen and you can select a scene in the same way as described in Step 4.
Night Scene
Used for night scenes.
Use a tripod, etc. to prevent shaking
MENU Exit
Exposure Modes
Use the exposure modes to change the sensitivity, shutter speed and aperture and take pictures according to your own photographic vision.
e
K
Mode
Program
Sensitivity
Priority b Shutter Priority c a
Aperture
Priority
Manual
Characteristics
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure according to
Program line when taking pictures.
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure according to the set sensitivity.
Lets you set the desired shutter speed to freeze or emphasize subject movement. Take pictures of fast moving subjects that look still or subjects that give a sense of movement.
Lets you set the desired aperture value for controlling the depth of field. Use it to obtain a blurred or sharp background.
Lets you set the shutter speed and aperture value to capture the picture with creative intent.
Page
4
96
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 96 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Exposure
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by a combination of shutter speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinations of shutter speed and aperture value for a particular subject. Different combinations produce different effects.
4
Effect of Shutter Speed
By changing the shutter speed, you can manipulate how time is expressed in the pictures you create. Unlike with your own naked eyes, in a picture you can capture a fraction of a moment or a whole period of time, creating different effects.
Use the b (Shutter Priority) mode.
Using slower shutter speed
If the subject is moving, the image will be blurred because the shutter is open longer.
It is possible to enhance the effect of motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) by intentionally using a slower shutter speed.
Using faster shutter speed
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow freezing the action of a moving subject.
A faster shutter speed also helps to prevent camera shake.
Effect of Aperture
By changing the aperture, you can control the depth of the area that appears in focus in the picture (the depth of field). By either narrowing the focus to emphasize a single point or giving depth to your picture instead you can completely change the feel of the picture you create.
Use the c (Aperture Priority) mode.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 97 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Opening the aperture (reduce the aperture value)
Objects closer and farther than the focused subject will be more out of focus. For instance, if you take a picture of a flower against a landscape with the aperture open, the landscape in front and behind the flower will be blurred, emphasizing only the flower.
Closing the aperture (increase the aperture value)
The range in focus expands forward and backward. For instance, if you take a picture of a flower against a landscape with the aperture narrowed, the landscape in front and behind the flower will be in focus.
Aperture and Depth of Field
The following table summarizes how the aperture affects the depth of field.
The depth of field may also change depending on the lens used and the distance to the subject.
Aperture
Depth of field
Area of focus
Lens focal length
Distance to the subject
Open
(Smaller value)
Shallow
Narrow
Longer
(Telephoto)
Near
Close
(Larger value)
Deep
Wide
Shorter
(Wide-angle)
Far
• The depth of field for the W differs depending on the lens but compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject, the deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have a scale for depth of field because of their designs).
97
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 98 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
98
4
Setting the Sensitivity
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent to ISO 200 to 12800. The default setting is [AUTO].
1
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) in Capture mode.
The [Sensitivity] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [AUTO Setting] or [Fixed
Value].
Sensitivity
AUTO Setting
ISO
AUTO
200 1600
ISO
200
MENU Cancel
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to change the ISO sensitivity.
OK OK
For [AUTO Setting], change the maximum sensitivity.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 99 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• When the capture mode is set to n (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap) or Z
(Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode, or when the mode dial is set to C
(Movie), the sensitivity is fixed to AUTO and cannot be changed.
• When the capture mode is set to K (Sensitivity Priority) or a (Manual),
[AUTO Setting] is not displayed.
• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 100 to 25600 when
[3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89) is set to
[On]. However, the minimum sensitivity is ISO 200 when [Highlight
Correction] (p.207) is set to [On].
• Captured images may show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You can
reduce image noise by setting [High-ISO NR] in the [
A Rec. Mode 2] menu.
• You can select whether to set the sensitivity in increments of 1 EV or in
accordance with the EV step setting for exposure (p.118). This can be set in
[2. Sensitivity Steps] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89).
99
4
Expanding the Dynamic Range
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas. The larger it is, the better the whole range from dark to bright areas will appear in the picture.
By expanding the dynamic range, you can expand the light level expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult for bright area to occur in the image.
To expand the dynamic range, make the settings in [D-Range
Setting] of the [ A
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 100 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
100
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)
When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness or unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.
- when shooting with a long exposure
- when shooting with a high sensitivity setting
- when the temperature of the CMOS sensor is high
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. However, images shot with Noise Reduction will take longer to save.
4
High-ISO NR
Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.
1
Select [High-ISO NR] in the [ A Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [High-ISO NR] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Auto], [Off],
[Low], [Medium], [High] or
[Custom].
High-ISO NR
ISO
NR
AUTO
ISO
NR
OFF
Auto
Off
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
Low
Medium
High
ISO
NR CUSTOM
Custom
MENU Cancel OK OK
Auto
Off
Low/Medium/High
Custom
Applies Noise Reduction at optimally calculated levels throughout ISO range. (default setting)
Does not apply Noise Reduction at any ISO setting.
Applies Noise Reduction at constant chosen level throughout ISO range.
Applies Noise Reduction at user-defined levels for each ISO setting.
3
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Auto], [Off], [Low], [Medium] or [High], proceed to Step 7.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 101 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Setting] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The screen to set the noise reduction level according to the sensitivity appears.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select a sensitivity value and use the four-way controller ( sensitivity.
45 ) to set the level of noise reduction which is applied to the selected
High-ISO NR
ISO
ISO
ISO
ISO
100
200
400
800
ISO 1600
ISO 3200
ISO 6400
1 2
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the e-dial to display the [High-ISO
NR 2] screen.
Press the | button to reset the settings.
MENU Reset
The sensitivity values displayed vary according to the [1. EV Steps] and
[2. Sensitivity Steps] settings made in the [
A Custom Setting 1] menu
6
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
101
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 102 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
102
4
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Reduces noise during long exposures.
1
Select [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [ A Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [AUTO], [ON] or [OFF], and press the 4 button.
1 2 3 4
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU Cancel
NR
AUTO
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
OFF
OK OK
AUTO
ON
Determines conditions such as shutter speed, sensitivity, and internal temperature, and automatically applies Noise Reduction as necessary. (default setting)
Applies Noise Reduction when the exposure time is longer than
1 second.
Does not apply Noise Reduction.
OFF
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• Processing may take a while when shooting with Slow Shutter Speed NR set to [ON]. Pictures cannot be taken while an image is being processed.
• When the Noise Reduction function is activated, [ nr ] blinks on the status screen and in the viewfinder where the aperture value is normally displayed, and a countdown of processing time is displayed where the shutter speed is normally displayed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 103 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
103
Changing the Exposure Mode
This camera features the following five exposure modes. Use the mode
dial to change the exposure mode. (p.91)
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.
( z : Available #: Restricted × : Not available)
Exposure
Mode
Description
EV Compensation
Change
Shutter
Speed e
Program
K
Sensitivity
Priority b
Shutter
Priority c
Aperture
Priority a
Manual
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure according to
Program line when taking pictures.
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure according to the set sensitivity.
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.
Lets you set the aperture value for controlling the depth of field.
Lets you set the shutter speed and aperture value to capture the picture with creative intent.
z z z z
×
#
*1
× z
× z
Change
Aperture
Value
Change
Sensitivity
Page
#
*1
×
× z z z
Other than
AUTO z z
Other than
AUTO
*1 In [Green Button] of the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can make the setting so that the
shutter speed and/or aperture value can be changed by turning the e-dial. (p.105)
4
104
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 104 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring
When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the aperture to the s (AUTO) position while holding down the autolock button on the lens.
A
22 16 11 8 5.6
4
Using the e (Program) Mode
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure according to Program line when taking pictures.
You can also use the e-dial to change the shutter speed and aperture
value while maintaining the proper exposure. (p.105)
1
Set the mode dial to e .
2
Turn the e-dial while pressing the m c button to adjust the exposure.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 105 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
The EV compensation value is displayed in the status screen and viewfinder.
P
1/ 125
ISO
AUTO
200
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 5.6
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
105
EV compensation value
• EV compensation value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
and aperture value when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (p.98).
4
E-dial in Program
You can set the function of the e-dial when turned in e mode. Set in [Green Button] of the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (This operation is available only when [Green
Button] is assigned to the | button.)
If the | button is pressed after turning the e-dial, the camera returns to normal e mode.
Green Button
Green Button
Action in M Mode
E-dial in Program
P SHIFT
Tv
Av
OFF
Shifts combination of the aperture and shutter speed to obtain proper exposure
MENU Cancel OK OK
P SHIFT b c
Automatically adjusts the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure (Program shift). (default setting)
Sets the shutter speed.
Sets the aperture value.
OFF Disables the e-dial operation when turned in e mode.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 106 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
106
Using the K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.
The shutter speed and aperture value are automatically set according to the selected sensitivity to obtain a proper exposure.
1
Set the mode dial to K .
4
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the sensitivity.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder.
Sv
1/ 30
ISO 200
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 4.5
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
• You can set the sensitivity to a value equivalent to ISO 200 to 12800. [AUTO] is not available.
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the m c button to change the EV
• The sensitivity can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 107 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using the b (Shutter Priority) Mode
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed to have the subject show movement.
The aperture value is automatically set to give a proper exposure depending on the shutter speed.
1
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)
1
Set the mode dial to b .
107
4
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the range of 1/6000 to 30 seconds.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder.
Tv
1/ 125
ISO
AUTO
400
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 5.6
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
108
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 108 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the m c button to change the EV
• The shutter speed can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (p.98).
4
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark, the aperture value will blink in the status screen and viewfinder. If the subject is too bright, choose a faster shutter speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter speed. When the aperture value indication stops blinking, you can take a picture with proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
Using the c (Aperture Priority) Mode
Set the aperture value for controlling the depth of field. The depth of field is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear when the aperture is set to a large value, a small lens opening. The depth of field is shallower and the front and back of the focused object is blurred when the aperture is set to a small value, large lens opening.
The shutter speed is automatically set to the proper exposure depending on the aperture value.
1
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)
1
Set the mode dial to c .
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 109 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the aperture value.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder.
Av
1/ 30
ISO
AUTO
400
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 4.5
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
4
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the m c button to change the EV
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture value
when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (p.98).
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark, the shutter speed will blink in the status screen and viewfinder. When the subject is too bright, set the aperture to a smaller lens opening (larger number), and when too dark, set the aperture to a larger lens opening
(smaller number). Once blinking stops, you can take a picture with proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
109
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 110 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
110
Using the a (Manual) Mode
You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitable to take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode is convenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker) or overexposed (brighter) photographs.
1
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)
1
Set the mode dial to a .
4
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the range of 1/6000 to 30 seconds.
3
Turn the e-dial while pressing the m c button to adjust the aperture value.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 111 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder.
On the status screen, the e-dial indicator appears next to the shutter speed or aperture value, depending on which is being adjusted.
M
1/ 125
ISO 200
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 5.6
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
Of the shutter speed and aperture value, the value being adjusted is underlined in the viewfinder.
While adjusting the shutter speed or aperture value, the difference from the proper exposure (EV value) appears in the viewfinder. The proper exposure is set when [0.0] is displayed.
The EV compensation value blinks in the viewfinder when the difference from the proper exposure becomes ±3.0 or larger.
Difference from the proper exposure
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the mode dial is set to a , the sensitivity is set to the last set value.
• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or
1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [
A Custom Setting 1]
• The aperture value can also be changed by pressing the m c button once, taking your finger off the button and turning the e-dial. In this case, the aperture value is set when the m c button is pressed again or the exposure
metering timer (p.116) elapses.
111
4
112
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 112 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using AE Lock
When [AF/AE-L Button] in the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu is set to [AE
Lock] and the exposure is locked (p.120) by pressing the
= / L button in a mode, if the shutter speed or aperture value is changed, the combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes while the exposure value is retained.
Example) If the shutter speed is 1/125 sec. and aperture is F5.6 and these settings are locked with the = / L button, the aperture automatically changes to F11 if the shutter speed is changed to 1/30 sec. with the e-dial.
4
Action in a Mode
You can set the function of the | button when the camera is set to a mode. Set in [Green Button] of the [ A Rec. Mode
4] menu. (This operation is available only when [Green Button] is assigned to the |
Green Button
Green Button
Action in M Mode
E-dial in Program
P LINE
TvSHIFT
AvSHIFT
OFF
Sets the aperture and shutter speed to the
Program Line exposure
MENU Cancel OK OK
P LINE
Tv SHIFT
Av SHIFT
OFF
Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to obtain a proper exposure according to the Program Line. (default setting)
Adjusts the shutter speed while the aperture value remains fixed to obtain a proper exposure.
Adjusts the aperture value while the shutter speed remains fixed to obtain a proper exposure.
Disables the | button operation when pressed in a mode.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 113 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using the Bulb Shooting
This setting is useful when shooting night scenes and fireworks which require the long exposures.
1
Set the mode dial to a .
113
2
Turn the e-dial to the left ( f ) and set the shutter speed to h .
h appears after the slowest shutter speed (30 sec.).
M
Bulb
ISO 200
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 5.6
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
3
Press the shutter release button.
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept pressed.
In Bulb shooting, the following functions are not available.
- EV Compensation
- Exposure Bracketing
- Continuous Shooting
- Interval Shooting
- HDR Capture
4
114
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 114 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
• Turn the e-dial while holding down the m c button to adjust the aperture value.
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off during Bulb shooting.
• Use a sturdy tripod to prevent camera shake during Bulb shooting.
• To operate the shutter release button on the remote control, set in [15.
Remote Control in Bulb] of the [
A
Custom Setting 3] menu (p.90).
• You can reduce image noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by
the slow shutter speed. Set in [Slow Shutter Speed NR] of the [
A Rec.
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the shutter speed is set to h , the sensitivity is set to the last set value.
• The upper sensitivity limit for Bulb shooting is ISO 1600.
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, we recommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when shooting with a long exposure setting as the battery is being drained while the shutter
Selecting the Metering Method
Choose the part of the viewfinder to use for measuring brightness and determining exposure. The following three methods are available.
L Multi-segment Metering (default setting)
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in
16 different zones. Even in backlit locations, this mode automatically determines what level of brightness is in which portion and automatically adjusts exposure.
Multi-segment metering method is not available when using a lens other than a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens, or when the lens aperture ring is set to the position other than s .
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 115 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-segment
Metering
In [6. Link AE to AF Point] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89),
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during multi-segment metering.
1 Off Exposure is set separately from the AF point. (default setting)
2 On Exposure is set in accordance with the AF point.
M Center-weighted Metering
Metering is weighted at the center of the viewfinder. Use this metering when you want to compensate the exposure by experience, instead of leaving it to the camera. The illustration shows that sensitivity increases as the pattern height increases (center).
This mode does not automatically compensate for backlit scenes.
N Spot Metering
The brightness is measured only within a limited area at the center of the viewfinder.
You can use this in combination with the AE
Lock (p.120) when the subject is extremely
small and the correct exposure is difficult to obtain.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
4
115
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 116 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
116
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [AE Metering] and press the 4 button.
The [AE Metering] screen appears.
AE Metering
Multi-segment
JPEG
AF.A
12
M
HDR
OFF
[ 37 ]
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select a metering method.
AE Metering
Multi-segment
4
MENU Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also change the setting from the [ A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
OK OK
Setting the Meter Operating Time
You can set the exposure metering time to [10 sec.] (default setting),
[3 sec.] or [30 sec.] in [4. Meter Operating Time] of the [
A Custom
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 117 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Adjusting the Exposure
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose
(darken) your picture.
The exposure steps can be selected from 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps]
of the [ A Custom Setting 1] menu.
You can adjust the EV compensation value from –3 to +3 (EV).
1
Turn the e-dial while pressing the m c button.
The exposure is adjusted.
m c button
117
4 m is displayed in the status screen and viewfinder during adjustment.
Av
1/ 30
ISO
AUTO
400
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
AWB
AF.A
F 4.5
ISO
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
Compensation value
• EV compensation is not available when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).
• The EV compensation is not canceled by turning the camera off or by switching to another capture mode.
• If [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the [ A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.197), the compensation value is reset to 0.0 when the
| button is pressed.
• EV compensation can also be changed by pressing the m c button once, taking your finger off the button and turning the e-dial. In this case, EV compensation is set when the m c button is pressed again or the exposure
metering timer (p.116) elapses.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 118 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
118
4
Changing the Exposure Steps
Set the exposure compensation steps to
increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV
A Custom Setting 1] menu
Step Interval
1/3 EV
1/2 EV
1.
EV Steps
1
2
1/3 EV Steps
1/2 EV Steps
Exposure compensation steps now set to 1/3 EV
MENU Cancel OK OK
Exposure Setting Value
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0
Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting
(Exposure Bracketing)
You can take three consecutive images at three different exposure levels when the shutter release button is pressed. The first image is exposed with no compensation, the second image is underexposed (negative compensation) and the third image is overexposed (positive compensation).
Standard exposure Underexposure Overexposure
You can set [7. Auto Bracketing Order] in the [
A Custom Setting 1] menu
1 0 - + Standard ´ Underexposed ´ Overexposed (default setting)
2 - 0 + Underexposed ´ Standard ´ Overexposed
3 + 0 Overexposed ´ Standard ´ Underexposed
4 0 + Standard ´ Overexposed ´ Underexposed
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 119 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Exposure Bracketing is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to \ (Moving Object), or R (Kids)/ Y (Pet)/
Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode
- when the shutter speed is set to h
• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.
The function selected last is used.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select l .
Drive Mode
Exposure Bracketing
119
4
3 2 1 1 2 3
±0.5EV
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
Turn the e-dial to set the bracket value.
The following bracket values can be set according to the step interval set
in [1. EV Steps] (p.118) of the [
A Custom Setting 1] menu.
Step Interval
1/3 EV
1/2 EV
Bracket Value
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0
Available operations m c button + e-dial Adjusts the EV compensation only when taking underexposed or overexposed image with Exposure
Bracketing. Images are taken with an EV compensation value set to 0 (intermediate value).
| button Resets the compensation value to ±0. (Available only when [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in
[Green Button] of the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu
4
Press the 4 button.
The value for the first image blinks on the monitor.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 120 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
120
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder, and EV compensation value appears in the status screen and viewfinder when focused.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
Continue to press the shutter release button until three images are captured.
Three consecutive images will be taken according to the order set in
[7. Auto Bracketing Order] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89).
• When [AF Mode] is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked in the first image and is used for subsequent images.
• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure
Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice the amount of
the exposure metering timer (default setting is approx. 20 seconds) (p.116)
and you can take a picture at the next compensation value. In this case, autofocus works for each image. After about twice the amount of the exposure metering timer elapses, the camera returns to settings for taking the first image.
• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or an external flash (P-TTL auto only) to change only the flash output continuously.
However, when using an external flash, holding the shutter release button down to take three consecutive images may cause the second and third images to be taken before the flash is fully charged. Take each image after confirming that charging is complete.
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting
(AE Lock)
AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking a picture. Use this when the subject is too small or is backlit and a proper exposure setting cannot be obtained.
1
Select [AF/AE-L Button] in the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [AF/AE-L Button] screen appears.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 121 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [AE Lock].
AF/AE-L Button
AF1
AF2
AF
AE-L
Enable AF1
Enable AF2
Cancel AF
AE Lock
Locks the exposure value when the AF/AE-L button is pressed
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
5
Set the exposure and press the
= / L button.
The camera locks the exposure
(brightness) at that instant.
@ is displayed in the status screen and viewfinder while the AE Lock is engaged.
• The exposure remains locked as long as the = / L button is kept pressed or the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure
remains locked for twice the amount of the exposure metering timer (p.116)
even after taking your finger off the = / L button.
• You will hear a beep when the = / L button is pressed. The beep can
• AE Lock is not available when the shutter speed is set to h .
• When any of the following operations are performed, AE Lock is canceled.
- the = / L button is pressed again
- the Q button, 3 button or M button is pressed
- the mode dial is turned
- the lens is changed
- the lens with an s (Auto) position is set to other than the s position
• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on the zooming position even while the AE Lock is engaged when using a zoom lens for which the maximum aperture varies depending on the focal length.
However, the exposure value does not change and a picture is taken at a brightness level set when the AE Lock is activated.
• The exposure can also be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-L with AF Locked] of the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.133)
121
4
122
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 122 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Focusing
You can focus with the following methods.
=
\
Autofocus
Manual focus
The camera automatically focuses on the subject when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
Manually adjust the focus.
4
Using the Autofocus
You can also choose the autofocus mode from l (Single mode) where the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject and the focus is locked at that position, k (Continuous mode) where the subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter release button is pressed halfway, and f (Auto) which automatically switches between l and k . The default setting is f .
1
Set the focus mode lever to = .
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 123 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Look through the viewfinder and press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes into focus. (When blinking, the subject is not in focus.)
1 Subjects that are difficult to focus on
Focus Indicator
Using the = / L Button to Focus on the Subject
You can set the camera so that focusing is performed when the = / L button is pressed. Use this setting when the autofocus by pressing the shutter release button halfway is not desired.
1
Select [AF/AE-L Button] in the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [AF/AE-L Button] screen appears.
4
123
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 124 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
124
4
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Enable AF1] or
[Enable AF2].
AF/AE-L Button
AF1
AF2
AF
Enable AF1
Enable AF2
Cancel AF
AE-L AE Lock
AF is performed when the
AF/AE-L button is pressed
MENU Cancel OK OK
Enable AF1
Enable AF2
Cancel AF
AE Lock
Autofocus is performed by using the = / L button or the shutter release button. (default setting)
Autofocus is performed only when the = / L button is pressed and not when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
\ appears in the viewfinder while the = / L button is pressed. Autofocus is not performed when the shutter release button is pressed. (Take your finger off the = /
L button to return to normal autofocus mode.)
The exposure setting is locked when the = / L button
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
5
Press the = / L button while looking through the viewfinder.
Autofocus is performed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 125 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
125
Setting the AF Mode
You can choose from the following three autofocus modes.
f
Auto l
Single mode
Switches automatically between l and k modes according to the subject. (default setting)
• [AF Mode] is fixed to f in I (Auto Picture) mode.
• Even if f is selected, [AF Mode] is fixed to l when taking pictures by using Live View with the mode dial set to e , K , b , c or a .
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject, the focus is locked at that position (Focus Lock). To focus on another subject, take your finger off the shutter release button first, then press the shutter release button halfway again.
• [AF Mode] is fixed to l in = (Portrait), s (Landscape), q
(Macro), .
(Night Scene Portrait) and a (Flash Off) of Picture mode or A (Night Scene), Q (Surf & Snow), K (Food), K
(Sunset), Z (Night Scene HDR), U (Candlelight), and E
(Museum) of H (Scene) mode.
• The AF assist light turns on as necessary. (p.127)
• Set the action priority for when the shutter release button is
pressed fully in [9. AF.S Setting] in the [
A Custom Setting 2] menu
1 Focus-priority
2 Release-priority
The shutter cannot be released until the subject is in focus. (default setting)
If the subject is too close to the camera, move back and take the picture. If the
subject is difficult to focus (p.73), adjust
The shutter can be released even if the subject is not in focus.
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 126 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
126
4 k
Continuous mode
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter release button is pressed halfway. The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder and you will hear a beep. Even if the subject is not in focus, the shutter can be released when the shutter release button is pressed fully.
• Available only when the mode dial is set to e , K , b , c or a .
• [AF Mode] is fixed to k in \ (Moving Object) of Picture mode and n (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap), R (Kids), and Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the
= / L button is used to adjust the focus, the camera automatically tracks the subject if it is determined to be a moving object.
• Set the action priority for Continuous Shooting in [10. AF.C
A
Custom Setting 2] menu (p.89).
1 Focus-priority
2 FPS-priority
Takes pictures giving priority to keeping the subject in focus during Continuous
Shooting. (default setting)
Takes pictures giving priority to the shooting speed during Continuous
Shooting.
1
Set the focus mode lever to = .
2
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [AF Mode] and press the 4 button.
AF Mode
AF.A
HDR
OFF
The [AF Mode] screen appears.
AF.A
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 127 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select an AF mode.
AF Mode
AF.S
AF.C
MENU Cancel OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• You can also change the setting from the [ A
• [AF Mode] cannot be changed when the capture mode is set to Picture mode or H (Scene) mode.
• Always set the camera to l when using the Quick-Shift Focus System on a DA lens.
4
You can set whether or not to use the AF assist light during l
mode in [11. AF Assist Light] in the [
A
Custom Setting 2] menu (p.89).
1 On
To make focusing easier when the subject is in a dark location, the AF assist light turns on when the shutter release button is pressed halfway. (default setting)
2 Off The AF assist light will not be used.
127
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 128 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
128
4
AF Fine Adjustment
You can adjust the AF focusing position.
• Be sure to use [AF Fine Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture images with the appropriate focus.
• Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain the accurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test shots.
1
Select [21. AF Fine Adjustment] in the [
A Custom
Setting 3] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [On] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [21. AF Fine Adjustment] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to adjust the value.
21. AF Fine Adjustment
+3
±0 MENU Cancel
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 5 )
Four-way controller ( 4 )
| button
Adjusts the focus to a closer position.
Adjusts the focus to a farther position.
Resets the adjustment value to ±0.
4
Press the 4 button.
The adjustment value is saved.
5
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 129 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
6
Take a test picture.
You can easily check the focusing point by enlarging the image during
Digital Preview (p.140) or Live View (p.159).
Select [Off] in Step 2 to negate an effect of the adjustment value (however, this does not reset the value).
129
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to.
Selected AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area).
b c
Auto
(5 AF Points)
Auto
(11 AF Points)
S
O
Select
Spot
Out of the 5 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF point even if the subject is not centered. (default setting)
Out of the 11 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF point even if the subject is not centered.
Sets the focusing area to the user selected point from eleven points in the AF frame.
Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [Select AF
Point] and press the 4 button.
Select AF Point
Auto (5 AF Points)
HDR
OFF
The [Select AF Point] screen appears.
AF.A
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 130 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
130
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select a focusing area.
Select AF Point
Auto (5 AF Points)
AUTO
4
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• You can also change the setting from the [ A
• AF point(s) are not illuminated red in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for
[8. Superimpose AF Area] in the [
A Custom Setting 2] menu.
• The focusing area is fixed to O regardless of this setting when using lenses other than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lenses.
Setting the Focus Position in the AF Frame
1
Set the focusing area to S and press the 4 button.
Select AF Point
Select
The camera is ready to take a picture.
MENU Cancel OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 131 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to change the AF point.
The selected AF point appears in the status screen.
AUTO
PICT
1/ 20
ISO
AUTO
800
AF.A
F 5.6
-3 2 1 1 2 +3
JPEG 12
M
[
AWB OK
S
37 ]
Available operations
4 button Returns the AF point to the center of the AF frame.
Press and hold 4 button Disables changing the AF point and enables direct key operation of the four-way controller
( 2345 ). To enable changing the AF point, press the 4 button while direct key operation is enabled. You will hear a beep when switching between enabled and disabled.
The AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder
(Superimpose AF Area) and you can check where you set the AF point.
4
131
The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned off or the focusing area is switched to b , c or O .
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 132 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
132
4
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock)
If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot automatically focus on the subject. In this case, set [AF Mode] to l
(Single mode) first, focus the camera on the subject in the focusing area, lock the focus at that position (Focus Lock), and then recompose your picture.
1
Set [AF Mode] to l .
2
Frame the desired composition for your picture in the viewfinder.
Example) The person is out of focus and the background is focused instead.
3
Center the subject to focus in the viewfinder and press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes into focus. (When blinking, the subject is not in focus.)
4
Lock the focus.
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain locked.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 133 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
5
Recompose the picture while keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway.
• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ] is displayed.
• Turning the zoom ring with the focus locked may cause the subject to be out of focus.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.269)
• You cannot set the focus lock when [AF Mode] is set to k (Continuous mode), or the capture mode is set to \ (Moving Object) of Picture mode, or n (Stage Lighting), R (Kids), Y (Pet) or l (Night Snap) of H (Scene) mode. In such cases, the autofocus continues to focus on the subject until the shutter is released (Continuous Autofocus).
4
Locking Exposure when the Focus is Locked
Set [5. AE-L with AF Locked] in the
[ A
Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89) to
lock the exposure value while the focus is locked. By default, the exposure is not locked when the focus is locked.
5.
AE-L with AF Locked
1
2
Off
On
AE is locked when the focus is locked
MENU Cancel OK OK
1 Off Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)
2 On Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.
133
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 134 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
134
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)
When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.
4
Using the Focus Indicator
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in focus even during manual focus.
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ] .
1
Set the focus mode lever to \ .
2
Look through the viewfinder, press the shutter release button halfway and turn the focusing ring.
The focus indicator ] appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes into focus.
MF
AF
Focus Indicator
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 135 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when the
subject is difficult to focus (p.73) and the focus indicator will not appear.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.269)
135
Using the Viewfinder Matte Field
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.
1
Set the focus mode lever to \ .
4
2
Look through the viewfinder and turn the focusing ring until the subject is clearly visible in the viewfinder.
MF
AF
136
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 136 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode
When [20. Catch-in Focus] in the [
A
is set to [On], if [AF Mode] is set to f or l and one of the following types of lenses is attached, catch-in focus shooting is enabled and the shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into focus.
• Manual focus lens
• DA or FA lens that has an = and \ setting on the lens (the setting on the lens must be set to \ before shooting)
How to Take Pictures
1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.
2 Set the focus mode lever to = .
3 Set [AF Mode] to f or l .
4 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.
5 Press the shutter release button fully.
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into focus at the set position.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 137 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before Shooting (Preview)
You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition, exposure and focus before taking a picture.
There are two preview methods.
Preview Method Description
| Optical Preview For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.
e Digital Preview
For checking the composition, exposure and focus on the monitor.
137
You can also use the Live View function to display a real-time image on the monitor and change the shooting function settings during display and check the
settings by enlarging the image. Refer to p.159 for details.
4
Assigning the Preview Function to the Green
Button
First, assign the preview function to the | button.
1
Select [Green Button] in the
[ A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Green Button] screen appears.
1 2 3 4
Color Space
RAW File Format
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
Memory
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU Exit
2
Press the four-way controller
( 5 ).
Green Button
Green Button
Action in M Mode
E-dial in Program sRGB
PEF
AF1
35mm
P LINE
P SHIFT
MENU
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 138 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
138
3
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Optical Preview] or [Digital Preview] and press the
4 button.
If you selected [Optical Preview], proceed to Step 6.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Histogram],
[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge
Instant Review].
Green Button
RAW
Green Button
Custom Image
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
Digital Filter
Cross Processing
One Push File Format
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Green Button
Digital Preview
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review
MENU
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The preview function is assigned to the | button and the camera is ready to take a picture.
While shooting with Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure or Live View, Optical
Preview is used regardless of the setting.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 139 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Displaying the Optical Preview
1
Position the subject inside the AF frame and press the shutter release button halfway to focus on the subject.
2
Press the | button while looking through the viewfinder.
You can check the depth of field in the viewfinder while the | button is pressed.
During this time, no shooting information is displayed in the viewfinder, and the shutter cannot be released.
3
Take your finger off the | button.
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.
4
139
140
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 140 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Displaying the Digital Preview
1
Focus on the subject, then compose the picture in the viewfinder and press the | button.
4
The icon ( | ) appears on the monitor during preview and you can check the composition, exposure and focus.
INFO
Available operations
E-dial
M button
Enlarges the preview image. (p.223)
Saves the preview image. Select [Save as] and press the 4 button.
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 141 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera Shake
141
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking pictures in situations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake Reduction function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps slower shutter speed without a risk of camera shake.
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the following situations.
• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night, on cloudy days and in the shade
• When taking telephoto pictures
Blurred picture
Picture taken with the Shake Reduction function
4
• The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by subject movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter speed.
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake
Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very slow shutter speed, for example when panning or shooting night scenes. In this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 142 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
142
4
Setting the Shake Reduction Function
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [Shake
Reduction] and press the 4 button.
Shake Reduction
On
AF.A
HDR
OFF
The [Shake Reduction] screen appears.
JPEG 12
M
[
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select k or l .
Shake Reduction
On
37 ] k
Uses Shake Reduction. (default setting) l Does not use Shake Reduction.
MENU Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
k appears in the viewfinder and the
Shake Reduction function is activated.
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 143 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
143
• Be sure to turn the Shake Reduction function off when using the camera with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function automatically turns off in the following situations.
- Self-timer shooting
- Remote Control shooting
- when the shutter speed is set to h
- when [Auto Align] is set to P (Off) in the [HDR Capture] setting
- when using the flash in the wireless mode
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned on when the capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode.
• You can also change the setting from the [ A
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) right after turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the
Shake Reduction function to become stable, and then press the shutter button gently. If k appears in the viewfinder when you press the shutter release button halfway, the camera is ready to take a picture.
• The Shake Reduction function is available with any W compatible PENTAX lens. However, when the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position or a lens without an s
position is used, the camera will not operate unless [22.
Using Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [
A Custom Setting 4] menu. Set this beforehand. In such cases, however, some functions will be restricted. Refer
to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for details.
4
When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information such as focal length.
If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lens information is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
If you use a lens whose information such as focal length cannot be
automatically obtained (p.312), the [Input Focal Length] setting screen
appears when the camera is turned on with the Shake Reduction function set to k .
Set the focal length manually in the [Input Focal Length] setting screen.
• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lens whose information such as focal length can be automatically obtained.
• When using a lens without the s position on the aperture or with the aperture set to a position other than the s
position, set [22. Using Aperture Ring] in
the [ A
Custom Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. (p.314)
• The effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well as focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 144 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
144
4
1
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) or the e-dial to set the focal length.
Select from the following 34 focal length values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)
8 10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
550 600 700 800
Input Focal Length
100
MENU Cancel
120
135
OK OK
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting being used in the same manner.
2
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [ A Rec.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 145 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Shooting with Self-timer
This camera has the following two types of self-timers.
g
Z
Self-timer
(12 sec.)
Self-timer
(2 sec.)
Shutter is released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode to include the photographer in the picture.
A mirror pops up immediately after shutter release button is pressed (Mirror lock-up function). The shutter is released after about 2 seconds. Use this mode to avoid camera shake when the shutter release button is pressed.
The AE Lock function is activated and exposure is locked immediately before the mirror pops up.
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
4
145
2
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select g
.
4
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) and use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select g or Z .
Drive Mode
Self-timer (12 sec.)
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
MENU Cancel OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 146 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
146
4
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in focus.
7
Press the shutter release button fully.
For g , the self-timer lamp starts blinking slowly and blinks rapidly 2 seconds before the shutter is released. The beep is heard and the rate increases. The shutter will be released about 12 seconds after the shutter release button is pressed fully.
For Z , the shutter will be released about 2 seconds after the shutter release button is pressed fully.
• The self-timer shooting is not available when the capture mode is set to \
(Moving Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.
• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if
[Drive Mode] is set to P
(Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [
A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when g or Z is set.
• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.269)
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock
function (p.120). The light entering viewfinder has no effect on the exposure
when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 147 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Shooting with Remote Control (Optional)
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remote
You can select from the following two settings for remote control shooting.
h Remote Control i
Remote Control
(3s delay)
The shutter is released immediately after the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
4
147
2
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select h .
4
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) and use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select h or i .
Drive Mode
Remote Control
The self-timer lamp will blink and the camera is in a stand-by status.
MENU Cancel
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 148 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
148
4
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when focused.
7
Point the remote control unit towards the remote control receiver on the front of the camera and press the shutter release button on the remote control unit.
4 m
The operating distance of the remote control unit is about 4 m from the front of the camera.
After a picture is taken, the self-timer lamp lights for 2 seconds and then returns to blinking.
• The remote control shooting is not available when the capture mode is set to
\ (Moving Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.
• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with the remote control unit. Focus on the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.
When [14. AF with Remote Control] is set to [On] in the [
A Custom Setting 2]
menu (p.89), you can use the remote control unit to adjust the focus. (AF
cannot be used with the remote control unit during Live View.)
• When using the Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1, AF can be operated with the S button. The { button cannot be used.
• When using the remote control unit, the built-in flash does not pop up automatically even when set to g (Auto Flash Discharge). Press the K / i
button to pop up the built-in flash beforehand. (p.78)
• Select a mode other than h or i in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the remote control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if [Drive Mode] is set to P
(Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [
A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when h or i is set.
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock
function (p.120). The light entering the viewfinder has no effect on the
exposure when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).
• The remote control may not operate in backlit conditions.
• The Remote Control F can send a remote control signal about 30,000 times.
Contact a PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this will involve a fee).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 149 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Taking Pictures Continuously
Continuous Shooting
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is kept pressed.
The following two types of continuous shooting are available.
g
Continuous
Shooting (Hi) h
Continuous
Shooting (Lo)
For JPEG image with E / C , up to 25 frames are taken continuously at approximately 6 fps. The shooting interval will increase as the buffer fills up.
For JPEG image with E / C , pictures are taken continuously at approximately 2 fps until the SD Memory
Card is full.
4
When the file format is [RAW], up to 12 frames for g and up to 36 frames for h can be taken continuously.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select g .
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) and use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select g or h .
Drive Mode
Continuous Shooting (Hi)
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take pictures continuously.
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when focused.
149
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 150 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
150
4
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.
• The drive mode is fixed to g when the capture mode is set to \ (Moving
Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.
• If [AF Mode] is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked in the first frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.
• Focusing is continuously activated during continuous shooting when
[AF Mode] is set to k (Continuous mode).
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the built-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release before the
built-in flash is ready in [16. Release While Charging] of the [
A Custom
• Select a mode other than g or h in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the continuous shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if [Drive Mode] is set to P
(Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [
A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
• The shooting speed may be slower when [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-
Chromatic-Ab Adj] (p.211) is set to [On].
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 151 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Interval Shooting
During Interval Shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set time.
• Interval Shooting is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to C (Movie), or Z (Night Scene HDR) of
H (Scene) mode
- when the shutter speed is set to h
- when Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set
• When Interval Shooting is set, Multi-exposure is not available.
1
Select [Interval Shooting] in the [ A Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Interval].
Interval Shooting
Start Shooting
When taking two or more pictures, set the wait time until the next picture is taken.
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select the number of hours, minutes, and seconds, and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to set the time.
You can set up to 24 hours, 00 minutes, and 00 seconds.
Interval
Number of Shots
Start Interval
Start Time
MENU Cancel
00 00 00 "
002images
Now
OK OK
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Number of Shots].
Set the number of shots to be taken.
Press the four-way controller ( 45 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the number of shots to be taken.
You can select between 1 and 999 shots.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Start Interval].
Set the time when the first picture is taken.
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Now] or [Set Time].
Now Shooting starts immediately. You can take two or more pictures.
Set
Time
Shooting starts at the set time. Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) to select [Start Time], use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select the time, and use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the start time.
4
151
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 152 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
152
4
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
Interval Shooting
Standby
The focus indicator ] appears when the subject is in focus.
Remaining Shots 100images
Interval 00 00 00 "
MENU Exit
7
Press the shutter release button fully.
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in
Step 2.
After the set number of pictures is taken, the camera returns to normal
Capture mode.
• The camera cannot be operated during Interval Shooting. To cancel the
Interval Shooting, press any button on the back of the camera or press the shutter release button and the 3 button to display the exit confirmation screen, and then use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Exit] and press the 4 button. You can also exit the Interval Shooting by turning the main switch off or turning the mode dial.
• 9 (Single Frame Shooting) is selected regardless of the current drive mode setting.
• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l (Single mode) or if the [Interval] setting is too short and the previous image processing cannot be completed before taking the next picture, no picture may be taken.
• Although each shot taken is displayed on the monitor with Instant Review, they cannot be enlarged or deleted.
• The [Interval] setting is disabled when [Number of Shots] is set to [1].
• Interval Shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no more available space.
• If the Auto Power Off function (p.281) turns the camera off during Interval
Shooting, the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time approaches.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when using
the Interval Shooting over a long period of time. (p.50)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 153 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Multi-exposure
You can create a composite picture by taking multiple frames.
• Multi-exposure is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to C (Movie), or Z (Night Scene HDR) of
H (Scene) mode
- when Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set
• When Multi-exposure is set, the following functions are not available.
- Exposure Bracketing or Interval Shooting (The function selected last is used)
- Distortion Correction or Lateral Chromatic Aberration Adjustment
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [ A Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Number of
Shots].
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the number of shots.
Select from 2 to 9 shots.
Multi-exposure
Start Shooting
Number of Shots
Auto EV Adjustment
2 times
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Auto EV
Adjustment] and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
When set to O (On), the exposure is adjusted automatically according to the number of shots.
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
4
153
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 154 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
154
4
7
Take the picture.
The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the shutter release button is pressed. Press the K / i button during
Instant Review to discard pictures taken up to that point and take pictures again from the first frame.
The pictures are saved when the set number of shots is taken, and then the [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.
• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the pictures that have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is ended.
- when the Q button, 3 button, four-way controller ( 234 ) or M button is pressed
- when the mode dial is turned
- when Exposure Bracketing is set
• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent composite image of the pictures taken is displayed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 155 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters
155
You can apply a filter when taking pictures.
The following filters can be selected.
Filter Name
Toy Camera
Retro
High Contrast
Extract Color
Starburst
Fish-eye
Effect
For taking pictures that look as if taken with a toy camera.
For taking pictures with the look of old photos.
Parameter
Shading Level: +1 to +3
Blur: +1 to +3
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow
Toning: -3 to +3
Frame Composite: None/Thin/
Medium/Thick
For taking pictures with high contrasts.
+1 to +5
For extracting two specific colors and making the rest of the image black and white.
For taking pictures with a soft focus throughout the image.
For taking pictures of night scenes or lights reflected on water with a special sparkling look by adding extra glitter to the highlights.
Extracted Color 1: Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/
Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 1:
-2 to +2
Extracted Color 2: Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/
Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2:
-2 to +2
Soft Focus: +1 to +3
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow
Crystal/Heart/Musical Note
Effect Density: Small/Medium/
Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
For taking pictures that look as if taken with a fish-eye lens.
Weak/Medium/Strong
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 156 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
156
4
Filter Name
Custom
Effect
Customize and save a filter to your own preferences.
Parameter
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/
Blue/Yellow
Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
For taking pictures with the selected color filter. Choose from 18 filters (6 colors ×3 tones).
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/
Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow
Color Density: Light/Medium/
Dark
*1 Not available when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).
*2 Available only when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).
• Digital Filter is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])
• When Digital Filter is set, the following functions are not available
- Continuous Shooting, Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure
- HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)
Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 157 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [Digital Filter] and press the 4 button.
The screen for selecting a filter appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the background.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select a filter.
Digital Filter
Not use any filters
JPEG
AF.A
12
M
Starburst
HDR
OFF
[ 37 ]
157
4
MENU Cancel Check
INFO
OK OK
4
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the parameter and the four-way controller ( 45 ) to adjust the parameter’s value.
Shape
MENU Cancel Check
INFO
OK OK
Available operations m c button
M button
Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image with the filter effect applied. (Not available when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).)
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and press the 4 button.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
158
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 158 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• You can also change the settings from the [ A
• Set in [Movie] of the [ A Rec. Mode 3] menu when the capture mode is set to
C
• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 3 to finish shooting with digital filter.
• You can also apply digital filter effects to JPEG/RAW images after shooting
them in Playback mode. (p.253)
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 159 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Shooting with Live View
159
You can shoot a picture while displaying the real-time image on the monitor.
• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightness of the subject is low or high.
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image may flicker.
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become stable before shooting.
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.
• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When Live View is ended after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can be restarted by pressing the U button.
• If you continue shooting with Live View for a prolonged period, the internal temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality images. It is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To prevent the image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera to cool down while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high, l (temperature warning) will appear on the monitor and Live View may not be available.
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as in direct sunlight, l (temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.
• If Live View is used even after l (temperature warning) appears, Live View may end before 5 minutes elapse. Shooting with the viewfinder is available even if Live View is ended.
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur in the Live View image and/or captured image.
4
• During Live View, nothing is displayed in the viewfinder.
• Holding the camera by hand and shooting while viewing the monitor may cause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.
• Live View is not displayed when data is being saved to an SD Memory Card.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 160 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
160
4
Setting Live View
You can set the display and autofocus method for Live View.
1
Select [Live View] in the [ A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Live View] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select an autofocus method.
Live View
Autofocus Method
Show Grid
Info Overlay
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
MENU Cancel OK OK
I
Face Detection
AF i Contrast AF
S
Phase
Difference AF
Gives autofocus priority to detected faces and performs contrast autofocus. A yellow frame appears for a main face (white frames appear for other faces), and autofocus and automatic exposure are performed for the main face. (default setting)
The face detection is not performed when the focus mode is set to \ (except when in I (Auto
Picture)).
Displays Live View and performs autofocus based on the information obtained from the image sensor.
Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the
AF sensor.
If the shutter release button is pressed halfway during Live View, the Live View image will disappear and the autofocus system operates. Once focused, the Live View image will be displayed again.
3
Press the 4 button.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 161 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Show Grid] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select a grid display type and press the 4 button.
Select from [Off] (default setting), e
(4×4 Grid), f (Golden Section) or g
(Scale).
Live View
Autofocus Method
Show Grid
Info Overlay
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
MENU Cancel OK OK
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Info Overlay],
[Histogram] or [Bright/Dark Area].
7
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
161
4
It takes more time to focus on the subject when using I or i than when using S . It is also difficult for the camera to focus on the following objects (or under the following conditions).
- objects with poor contrast
- objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes
- objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as a water fountain
- objects whose distance from the camera changes
- small objects
- objects appearing in both the foreground and background
- when using a special filter
- objects at the edge of the screen
162
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 162 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Taking Still Pictures
1
Select a Capture mode.
Set the mode dial to any mode other than C .
2
Press the U button.
4
The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor.
Press the U button again to exit Live View.
Live View display
(All of the indicators are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
14
-3 2 1
2000 F2.8
1 2 +3
ISO 3200
15 16 17
[1234]
18 19
10
11
12
13
1 Capture Mode
2 Flash Mode
3 Drive Mode
4 White Balance
5 Custom Image
6 Multi-exposure/Interval
Shooting/Digital Filter/HDR
Capture
2000 F2.8
20
ISO 400
21
[ 37]
7 Number of shots using Multiexposure/Cross Processing
8 Battery level
9 Temperature warning
10 Contrast AF frame
11 Phase Difference AF frame/AF point
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 163 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
12 EV Compensation
13 Histogram
14 AE Lock
15 Shutter speed
16 Aperture value
17 EV bar
18 Sensitivity
19 Remaining image storage capacity
20 Main face detection frame (Face
Detection AF)
21 Face detection frame (Face
Detection AF)
* Indicator 11 (Phase Difference AF frame) is displayed in white during
Live View. When the subject is in focus, a green square frame is displayed instead. It turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not displayed when the focus mode is set to \ .
* When 15, 16, and 18 can be changed, 5 appears next to the set value.
* Indicators 20 and 21 are displayed when [Autofocus Method] is set to
I and the camera detects person’s face(s). (Up to 16 face recognition frames are displayed on the monitor.)
Available operations
4 button
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
When the focusing area is set to S (Select) and
[Autofocus Method] is set to i or S , press this button to disable direct key operation of the four-way controller
( 2345 ) and enable changing the AF point.
Changes the AF point when the AF point can be changed.
Press the 4 button to return AF point to the center of the
AF frame.
Press and hold
4 button
Disables changing the AF point and enables direct key operation of the four-way controller ( 2345 ).
M button Enlarges the image to 2, 4, or 6 times (when the focus mode is set to \ , enlarges the image to 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 times). Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to move the display area, and press the | button to return the display area to the center.
(Available only when [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the [ A
3
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \ , turn the focusing ring until the subject is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
4
163
164
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 164 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• When [AF Mode] is set to k and [Autofocus Method] is set to I or i , the camera focuses on the center of the screen when autofocus starts and then automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus.
• Images captured in magnified display are recorded at normal size.
• If [Optical Preview] or [Digital Preview] is assigned to the | button in [Green
Button] of the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can check the depth of field in the viewfinder when you press the |
The status screen and control panel cannot be displayed during Live View. To change the settings, press the 3 button and change them in each menu.
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 165 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Recording Movies
You can record movies using Live View.
Changing the Movie Settings
You can record movies with a frame rate (number of frames shot per second) at 25 frames per second (fps), monaural audio, and the file format set to AVI.
1
Select [Movie] in the [ A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Movie] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
( 5 ), use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the number of recorded pixels, and press the
4 button.
1280x720 00:00'00"
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Sound
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
Movie Aperture Control Fixed
Shake Reduction
MENU Cancel OK OK
Recorded Pixels b (default setting) c
Pixels
1280×720
640×480
Aspect Ratio
16:9
4:3
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Quality Level] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the quality level and press the 4 button.
Select from C (Best; default setting), D (Better) and E (Good).
When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount of recordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.
4
165
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 166 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
166
4
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Sound] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select g or Z and press the 4 button.
g Records sound. (default setting)
Z Does not record sound.
7
Change the [Cross Processing] and [Digital Filter] settings as necessary.
For details, refer to p.216 for Cross Processing and p.155 for Digital
Filter.
8
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Movie
Aperture Control] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
9
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Fixed] or
[Auto] and press the 4 button.
Fixed
Auto
The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie recording starts. (default setting)
The aperture is controlled automatically. (The aperture value is fixed while recording a movie even if [Auto] is selected.)
10
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Shake
Reduction] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
11
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select k or l and press the 4 button.
k Uses Shake Reduction.
l Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)
12
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to record a movie.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 167 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Recording Movies
1
Set the mode dial to C .
Live View for movie recording is displayed.
Sound s
F2.8
-2 1 1 +2
00:30'00"
Recordable Time
Shake Reduction
Available operations
E-dial
| button
Changes the aperture value when [Movie Aperture
Control] is set to [Fixed]. (default setting)
Resets the aperture value when [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the
[ A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
Displays the setting screen when [Custom Image],
[Digital Filter] or [Cross Processing] is assigned to the |
m c button + e-dial Adjusts the EV compensation (±2 EV).
4 button When the focusing area is set to S (Select) and
[Autofocus Method] is set to i or S , press this button to disable direct key operation of the four-way controller ( 2345 ) and enable changing the AF point.
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
Changes the AF point when the AF point can be changed.
Press the 4 button to return AF point to the center of the AF frame.
4
167
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 168 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
168
4
Press and hold 4 button
M button
Disables changing the AF point and enables direct key operation of the four-way controller ( 2345 ).
Enlarges the image to 2, 4, or 6 times (when the focus mode is set to \ , enlarges the image to 2, 4,
6, 8, or 10 times). Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to move the display area.
2
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \ , turn the focusing ring until the subject is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording of the movie starts.
4
Press the shutter release button again.
Recording stops.
• When [Sound] is set to g (On), the camera operation sounds are also recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do not operate the camera while recording.
• When recording a movie, regardless of the AF mode setting, recording starts when the shutter release button is pressed fully even if the subject is not in focus.
• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.
• The flash is not available.
• When recording movies using image processing, such as Digital Filter, some frames may be omitted from the recorded movie.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high during movie recording, the recording may be terminated to protect the camera circuitry.
• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.
• Live View image in C mode is displayed according to the [Live View] setting
A Rec. Mode 3] menu. However, the histogram and
Bright/Dark Area warning are not displayed during movie recording.
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter
kit K-AC109 (optional) is recommended. (p.50)
• You can also use the optional remote control to record a movie. (p.147)
• EV compensation is also available during movie recording.
• The sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 169 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Playing Back Movies
Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the same manner as saved images.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose a movie to play back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
3
Press the four-way controller
( 2 ).
Movie playback starts.
4
169
Movie 10min00sec
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 2 )
E-dial
Four-way controller ( 5 )
Press and hold four-way controller ( 5 )
Four-way controller ( 4 )
Pauses/Resumes playback.
Volume control (6 levels)
Forwards a frame (during pause).
Fast-forwards playback while pressed.
Reverses playback./
Reverses a frame (during pause).
Fast-reverses playback while pressed.
Press and hold four-way controller ( 4 )
Four-way controller ( 3 )
M button
Stops playback./
Displays the playback mode palette (when
Saves the displayed image as a JPEG file.
When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed again.
You can use the optional AV cable I-AVC7 to play back recorded movies on a
TV screen or other AV devices. (p.242)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 170 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
170
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie
You can capture a single frame from a movie and save it as a JPEG still picture.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 2 )
in Step 3 on p.169 to pause the
movie, and display the frame to save as a still picture.
INFO
4 2
Press the M button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Movie 10min00sec
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The captured image is saved as a new image.
Save as
Cancel
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 171 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Editing Movies
Movies can be divided and unwanted segments can be deleted.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose a movie to play back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The playback mode palette appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select [ (Movie
Editing) and press the 4 button.
The movie editing screen appears.
5
Select point(s) where you want to divide the movie.
Up to four points can be selected.
00 min 00 sec
10 min 00 sec
4
171
MENU Exit OK OK
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 2 )
Four-way controller ( 5 )
Four-way controller ( 4 )
E-dial
| button
Plays back/Pauses a movie.
Moves forward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the next dividing point (during playback).
Moves backward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the previous dividing point
(during playback).
Volume control (6 levels)
Confirms/cancels a dividing point.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 172 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
172
6
Press the K / i button to delete unwanted segments.
The screen to select segment(s) to delete is displayed.
00 min
02 sec
10 min 00 sec
4
Select segments for deletion
MENU Exit OK
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 45 )
4 button
3 button
Moves the selection frame.
Confirms/cancels a selection of a segment to delete.
Exits the screen to select segments to delete.
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
00 min
00 sec
10 min 00 sec
MENU Exit OK OK
8
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The movie is divided at the specified points and the unwanted segments are deleted from it. And then the divided movie is saved as separate files and displayed on the screen.
MENU
Saves divided movie as separate files
Save as
Cancel
OK OK
Specify the dividing points in chronological order from the beginning of the movie. When canceling the selected dividing points, cancel each of them in reverse order (from the end of the movie to the beginning). Dividing point(s) cannot be added or canceled while specifying dividing point(s).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 173 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
5
Using the Flash
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of the
W
and describes how to take pictures with an external flash.
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode
.............................................................................. 174
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in
Flash ....................................................................178
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash .......179
Using an External Flash (Optional) .................. 180
174
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 174 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Flash Characteristics in Each
Exposure Mode
Using the Flash in b (Shutter Priority) Mode
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blur effect.
• Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set for taking a flash photograph.
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient brightness.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens is used.
5
Using the Flash in c (Aperture Priority) Mode
• You can set the desired aperture value to take a flash photograph when you want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 sec. to a
slow shutter speed (p.68) that reduces camera shake. The slowest
shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.
Using the Slow-speed Sync
You can use Slow-speed Sync in .
(Night Scene Portrait) of Picture mode or b (Shutter Priority) mode when shooting portraits with the sunset in the background. Both the portrait and the background are captured beautifully.
• Slow-speed Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.
• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 175 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using b Mode
1
Set the mode dial to b .
2
Use the e-dial to set the shutter speed.
The background is not properly exposed if the aperture value is blinking when the shutter speed is set. Adjust the shutter speed so that the aperture value does not blink.
3
Press the K / i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
4
Take a picture.
175
5
Using e / K / c Mode
1
Set the mode dial to e , K or c .
2
Press the K / i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
4
Select G or H and press the 4 button.
The shutter speed is set slower to give a proper exposure for the background.
5
Take a picture.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 176 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
176
5
Using a Mode
1
Set the mode dial to a .
2
Set the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure.
Set 1/180 sec. shutter speed or slower.
3
Press the K / i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
In a (Manual) mode, you can raise the built-in flash at any time prior to shooting.
4
Take a picture.
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync
Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,
Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects depending on when the flash is discharged.
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync, trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing light behind it.
Slow-speed Sync
(Leading Curtain Sync)
Trailing Curtain Sync
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 177 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
1
Set the mode dial to e , K , b , c or a .
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
3
Select I or k and press the 4 button.
4
Press the K / i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
5
Take a picture.
Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera shake.
177
5
178
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 178 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash
5
Relationships between the guide number, aperture and distance must be considered when shooting with the flash to obtain a correct exposure.
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.
Sensitivity
ISO 200
ISO 400
ISO 800
Built-in Flash
Guide Number
Approx. 12
Approx. 16
Approx. 24
Approx. 32
Sensitivity
ISO 3200
ISO 6400
Built-in Flash
Guide Number
Approx. 64
Approx. 96
Approx. 128
Approx. 192
ISO 1600 Approx. 48
*1 This can be used when [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [
A Custom Setting 1] menu is set to [On].
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value
The following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5 *
* The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.
Example)
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the aperture value is F4.0
L1 = 16 ÷ 4.0 = approx. 4 (m)
L2 = 4 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.8 (m)
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.8 m to 4 m.
However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the distance is 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at closer than 0.7 m, it causes vignetting in the picture corners, light is distributed unevenly and a picture may be overexposed.
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting distances.
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance
Example)
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the shooting distance is 5 m, the aperture value is:
F = 16 ÷ 5 = 3.2
If the resulting number (3.2, in the above example) is not available as a lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the above example) is generally used.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 179 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in
Flash
179
Depending on the lens used with the W , even if a lens without a hood is attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be available or may be limited due to vignetting.
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without problems.
* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.
Unavailable due to vignetting
Lens Name
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)
DA12-24mm F4ED AL
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)
FA
300mm F2.8ED (IF)
FA
600mm F4ED (IF)
FA
250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)
5
Available depending on other factors
Lens Name
F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5
DA16-45mm F4ED AL
DA
16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM
DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM
DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)
FA
28-70mm F2.8AL
FA SOFT 28mm F2.8
FA SOFT 85mm F2.8
Restrictions
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less than 20 mm.
When the focal length is less than 28 mm or when the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may occur.
When the focal length is less than 24 mm or when the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less than 35 mm.
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.
Built-in flash always discharges fully.
Built-in flash always discharges fully.
180
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 180 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using an External Flash (Optional)
5
Using an optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash mode, depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for details.
( z : Available #: Restricted × : Not available)
Flash
Built-in
Flash
Camera Function
Red-eye reduction flash
Auto flash discharge
After the flash is charged, the camera automatically switches to the flash sync speed.
Aperture value is automatically set in e mode and b mode.
P-TTL auto flash
Slow-speed Sync
Flash exposure compensation
AF assist light of external flash
Trailing Curtain Sync
Contrast-control-sync flash mode
Slave flash
High-speed flash sync
Wireless flash z z z z z
z z
× z
×
×
AF540FGZ
AF360FGZ z z z z z z z z z z z
z z
AF200FG
AF160FC z z z z
z z
×
×
×
×
×
*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit and the built-in flash is required.
Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus) cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 181 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ
The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT size to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital
Camera, the difference in focal length between a 35 mm camera and the W is automatically calculated based on the difference in angle of view and is displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D FA,
FA J, FA or F lens).
The conversion indicator appears and the FORMAT size indicator disappears when the exposure metering timer of the W is on (it returns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer is turned off).
Lens Focal Length
Exposure metering timer Off
Exposure metering timer On
85mm
/77mm
50mm 35mm
28mm
/24mm
20mm 18 mm
85mm 70mm 50mm 35mm 28mm 24mm *
58mm 48mm 34mm 24mm 19mm 16mm *
* Using wide-angle panel
Using P-TTL Auto Mode
You can use [P-TTL Auto] with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit. The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash and confirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it is backlit, etc.) using the camera 16-segment metering sensor. The flash output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more accurate exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external flash.
2
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
3
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL auto].
4
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then take a picture.
5
181
182
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 182 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• P-TTL auto is only available with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit.
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please refer to the external flash manual.
• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash mode is set to C or i . Therefore, it may not be suitable for daylight-sync shooting.
• Never press the K / i button when any external flash unit is attached to the camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both at once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.
5
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode
With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take a picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 second.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external flash (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) to the camera.
2
Set the mode dial to b or a .
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
4
Set the external flash sync mode to HS b (high-speed flash sync).
5
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then take a picture.
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is set faster than 1/180 sec.
• High-speed flash sync is not available when the shutter speed is set to h .
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 183 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using Flash in Wireless Mode
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the built-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.
• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use high-speed flash sync in wireless mode. This function cannot be used in combination with the built-in flash.
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the camera to SLAVE.
Setting the Channel for the External Flash
First, set the channel for the external flash unit.
1
Set the channel for the external flash unit.
2
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external flash.
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the shutter release button halfway.
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash is displayed in the viewfinder for 10 seconds.
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of the
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the external flash.
5
183
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 184 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
184
Using the Built-in Flash in Wireless Mode
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
2
Select r and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Flash Mode
Wireless Mode
5
0.0
MENU Cancel OK OK
When the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)) or the lens aperture is not set to the s position, r cannot be selected.
Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method
You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wireless mode.
Set in [17. Flash in Wireless Mode] of the [
A Custom Setting 3] menu
1
2
On
Off
Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (default setting)
Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.
HS b (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 185 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Wireless Shooting
Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash
Unit
1
Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on the camera, and place it at the desired location.
2
Set the camera flash to r mode, and press the K / i button.
3
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take a picture.
185
Using a Combination of External Flash Units
1
Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].
MASTER
CONTROL
Sets the camera to discharge both the flash directly connected to the camera and the wireless flash unit.
Sets the camera to discharge the flash directly connected to the camera as a control flash only, not as the main flash.
2
On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place it at the desired location.
3
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take a picture.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off in wireless mode.
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing high-speed flash sync shooting in wireless mode, set the flash directly connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.
5
186
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 186 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
5
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between the flash units before the flash is discharged.
Press the shutter release button fully.
È
1 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash
(relays the flash mode of the camera).
2 The wireless remote flash emits a test flash (relays confirmation of subject).
3 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash
(relays flash output to the wireless remote flash).
* The flash directly connected to the camera will emit a control flash one more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HS b (Highspeed sync) is set.
4 The wireless remote flash discharges.
When the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the
camera is set to [MASTER] or [17. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.184) is set
to [On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.
Red-Eye Reduction
As with the built-in flash, the red-eye reduction function is available with an external flash. However, this function may not be available on some flashes or may have restrictions for usage conditions. Refer to
• The red-eye reduction function works by discharging the flash twice
even when only an external flash is used. (p.79)
• If the red-eye reduction function of the built-in flash is used when the external flash is set as the slave unit or with the wireless function, the pre-flash for red-eye reduction will trigger the external flash. Do not use the red-eye reduction function when using a slave unit.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 187 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
187
Trailing Curtain Sync
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing Curtain Sync mode, the built-in flash will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully charged before shooting.
Connecting an External Flash with an
Extension Cord
When using the built-in flash with an external flash that does not have a wireless flash mode function such as AF200FG, attach the Hot Shoe
Adapter F
G
(optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect these with the Extension Cord F5P (optional) as shown in the illustration below.
The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the tripod screw.
Only a P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in flash.
When combining with the built-in flash
5
188
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 188 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension
Cords
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination with the built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or
AF200FG units as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external flash and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter
F with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).
Refer to the manual of the external flash for details.
When combining two or more external flashes
5
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 189 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of light discharged from multiple units.
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts, such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
1
Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.
2
Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrastcontrol-sync mode.
3
Set the mode dial to e , K , b , c or a .
4
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are fully charged and then take a picture.
5
189
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync mode is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master unit) : 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with the built-in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).
• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the builtin flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 190 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
190
Memo
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 191 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
6
Shooting Settings
This chapter describes how to set the save format for pictures taken and other settings.
Setting a File Format .......................................... 192
Setting the Green Button Function .................. 197
Setting the White Balance .................................. 200
Correcting Images .............................................. 207
Setting the Image Finishing Tone .....................213
192
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 192 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting a File Format
6
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels
You can select the number of recorded pixels from E , J , P and i .
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file size. The file size will also vary according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.
The default setting is E .
Recorded Pixels
E
J
P i
Pixels
4288×2848
3936×2624
3072×2048
1728×1152
Paper Size
14"×17" / A2 paper
10"×12" / A3 paper
8"×10" / A4 paper
5"×7" / A5 paper
The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of other factors.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [JPEG
Recorded Pixels] and press the
4 button.
JPEG Recorded Pixels
4288x2848
AF.A
HDR
OFF
The [JPEG Recorded Pixels] screen appears.
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 193 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select the number of recorded pixels.
When the number of recorded pixels is changed, the number of recordable images appears at the top right of the screen.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
JPEG Recorded Pixels
4288x2848
12
M
10
M
6
M
2
M
MENU Cancel
128
OK OK
You can also change the setting from the [ A
193
Setting the JPEG Quality Level
You can set the image quality level (compression ratio). The file size will also vary according to the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] setting. The default setting is C (Best).
Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.
C Best
D Better
E Good Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 194 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
194
6
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [JPEG
Quality] and press the 4 button.
The [JPEG Quality] screen appears.
JPEG Quality
HDR
OFF
JPEG
AF.A
12
M
[ 37 ]
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select a quality level.
When the quality level is changed, the number of recordable images at that quality level appears at the top right of the screen.
JPEG Quality 128
MENU Cancel
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also change the setting from the [ A
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 195 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the File Format
You can set the format of image files.
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
Captures images in JPEG format (default setting).
You can change the number of recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded
Pixels], and the image quality level in [JPEG Quality].
RAW format is a CMOS sensor output format saved without processing.
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not applied to the captured images, but they are saved as actual original information. When you perform the development process by using RAW
Development function (p.259), or using the provided software (PENTAX
Digital Camera Utility 4) after transferring RAW data to a computer, you can create JPEG images with these effects.
Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats.
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | button, you can press the | button to temporarily change the file format and save an image in
When Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set, the file format is fixed to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. To change the file format, turn these functions off.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [File Format] and press the 4 button.
File Format
HDR
OFF
The [File Format] screen appears.
AF.A
JPEG 12
M
[ 37 ]
6
195
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 196 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
196
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select a file format.
When the file format is changed, the number of recordable images appears at the top right of the screen.
File Format
JPEG RAW RAW+
128
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• You can also change the setting from the [ A
• The file format is fixed to [JPEG] when the capture mode is set to n (Stage
Lighting), l (Night Snap) or Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode.
6
Setting the RAW File Format
You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAW
File Format] of the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu
(p.88) when capturing images in RAW format.
1 2 3 4
Color Space
RAW File Format
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
Memory
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU Cancel sRGB
DNG
AF1
35mm
OK OK
PEF PENTAX’s original RAW file format (default setting)
DNG
General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by Adobe
Systems
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 197 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Green Button Function
You can assign one of the following functions to the | button and access the function by simply pressing the button while shooting.
Green Button
Custom Image
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
Resets the values being adjusted. (default setting)
Sets the Custom Image settings. (p.213)
Displays the Optical Preview. (p.139)
Displays the Digital Preview. (p.140)
Digital Filter
Sets the Digital Filter. (p.155)
Cross Processing
Sets the Cross Processing. (p.216)
One Push File
Format
Temporarily changes the file format. Simultaneously saves an image in both JPEG and RAW format, regardless of the
[File Format] setting. You can set whether to apply the setting to only one image or not, and select the file format when the |
1
Select [Green Button] in the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Green Button] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
( 5 ).
Green Button
Green Button
Action in M Mode
E-dial in Program
P LINE
P SHIFT
6
197
MENU
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 198 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
198
3
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select a function to assign to the | button, and press the 4 button.
Green Button
RAW
Green Button
Custom Image
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
Digital Filter
Cross Processing
One Push File Format
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
6
Setting the One Push File Format
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | button, specify the function settings.
1
Select [One Push File Format] in Step 3 of “Setting the
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Cancel after 1 shot].
3
Use the four-way controller
( 45 ) to select O or P .
Green Button
RAW One Push File Format
Cancel after 1 shot
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
MENU
O
P
The recording format returns to the original file format after a picture is taken. (default setting)
The setting is canceled when the following operations are performed.
- the | button is pressed again
- the Q button or 3 button is pressed
- the main switch is turned off
- the mode dial is turned
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 199 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose a file format.
The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format when the | button is pressed.
5
Press the four-way controller
( 5 ), and use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select a file format when the | button is pressed.
Green Button
RAW One Push File Format
Cancel after 1 shot
JPEG
RAW RAW+
RAW+
RAW+ RAW+
MENU Cancel OK OK
6
Press the 4 button.
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
199
6
200
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 200 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the White Balance
6
White balance is a function for adjusting the color of an image so that white objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied with the color balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F (Auto), or to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images.
F
G
H
^
J
I
L
CTE
K
Item
Auto
Daylight
Shade
Cloudy
Fluorescent
Light
Tungsten
Light
Flash
Manual
Settings
Automatically adjusts the white balance.
(default setting)
Color
Temperature
Approx. 4,000 to 8,000K
For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K
For use when taking pictures in the shade. It reduces the bluish color tones in a picture.
For use when taking pictures on cloudy days.
For use when taking pictures under fluorescent lighting. Select the type of fluorescent light.
D Fluorescent Light Daylight Color
N Fluorescent Light Daylight White
W Fluorescent Light Cool White
L Fluorescent Light Warm White
For use when taking pictures under light bulbs or other tungsten light. It reduces the reddish color tones in a picture.
For use when taking pictures using the built-in flash.
Use this to keep and strengthen the color tone of the light source in the image.
Use this to manually adjust the white balance according to the lighting so that white objects appear as a natural white.
Approx. 8,000K
Approx. 6,000K
Approx. 6,500K
Approx. 5,000K
Approx. 4,200K
Approx. 3,000K
Approx. 2,850K
Approx. 5,400K
–
–
*1 The color temperatures (K) shown above are all estimates. These do not indicate precise colors.
*2 CTE= Color Temperature Enhancement
White balance is fixed to F when the capture mode is set to Picture mode or H (Scene) mode, or when Cross Processing is set.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 201 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
1
Set the mode dial to e , K , b , c , or a .
2
Press the four-way controller ( 4 ) in Capture mode.
The [White Balance] screen appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the background.
3
Press the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select the white balance.
White Balance
Auto
201
CTE
MENU Cancel Check
INFO
OK OK
Available operations m c button
M button
Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image with the setting applied.
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and press the 4 button.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Because the light source changes when a flash discharges, you can set the white balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],
[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [12. WB When Using Flash] of the [
A Custom
6
202
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 202 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Color Temperature
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises, and towards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperature describes this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature (K: Kelvin).
This camera is capable of setting the white balance to enable taking pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting conditions.
Red tint Blue tint
2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000 12000 [ K ]
6
Adjusting the White Balance Manually
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when taking pictures. With the manual white balance, the camera can store delicate shades that cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance preset values provided in the camera. This provides the optimum white balance for your surroundings.
1
Select K
press the four-way controller
( 5 ).
White Balance
Manual
CTE
MENU Cancel Check OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 203 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a white area as the subject.
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
Set the focus mode lever to \ when the shutter cannot be released.
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.
4
Use the e-dial to select the entire screen or spot area for the measuring range.
203
OK OK
5
When a spot area is selected, use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to move the frame to the position you want to measure.
MENU Cancel
MENU Cancel OK OK
6
Press the 4 button.
The white balance fine-tuning screen appears when measuring is completed.
Adjust the white balance as necessary.
Manual
White Balance
SHUTTER Adjust
±0 ±0
±0
MENU Cancel Check
INFO
OK OK
7
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.
6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 204 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
204
8
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust the white balance.
• The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while displayed to remeasure the white balance.
• If a picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance may not be adjusted. In this case, adjust exposure to the correct amount level before adjusting the white balance.
• When the mode dial is set to C (Movie), the white balance cannot be measured. Adjust the white balance in any capture mode other than C before recording a movie.
6
Fine-Tuning the White Balance
You can fine-tune the white balance setting.
1
Perform the desired setting in Step 3 on p.201.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The fine-tuning screen appears.
3
Fine-tune the white balance.
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available on the G-M and B-A axes.
Shade
G1 ±0
±0
MENU Cancel Check OK OK
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 23 )
Four-way controller ( 45 )
| button
Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G) and magenta (M).
Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B) and amber (A).
Resets the adjustment value. (Available only when [Green Button] is assigned to | button in [Green Button] of the [ A Rec.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 205 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When set to K , the white balance can also be measured by pressing the shutter release button fully (except while recording a movie).
Setting the Color Space
You can select a color space to use.
sRGB Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)
AdobeRGB Sets to AdobeRGB color space.
Set [Color Space] in the [ A Rec. Mode 4]
1 2 3 4
Color Space
RAW File Format
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
Memory
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU Cancel
AF1
35mm
OK OK
The file naming system changes depending on the color space setting as shown below.
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG
For AdobeRGB: _IGPxxxx.JPG
“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
6
205
206
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 206 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Color Space
Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital cameras, monitors, and printers, differ. This color range is called the
Color Space.
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and
AdobeRGB.
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a computer.
AdobeRGB covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for occupational uses such as industrial printing.
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.
6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 207 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Correcting Images
The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted for when taking pictures.
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusts the brightness and reduces the occurrence of overexposed and underexposed areas.
Highlight Correction
Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of overexposed areas.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select [Highlight
Correction] and press the 4 button.
The [Highlight Correction] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select [Off] or [On].
Highlight Correction
Off
6
DR
200
OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
MENU Cancel
207
208
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 208 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• When [Highlight Correction] is set to [On], the minimum sensitivity is set to
ISO 400. If [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [
A
is set to [On], the sensitivity is set to ISO 200.
• [Highlight Correction] is fixed to [On] when the capture mode is set to n (Stage Lighting) or l (Night Snap) of H (Scene) mode.
6
Shadow Correction
Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of underexposed areas.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select [Shadow
Correction] and press the 4 button.
The [Shadow Correction] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select [Off], [Low], [Medium] or
[High].
Shadow Correction
Off
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also set Highlight Correction and Shadow Correction in [D-Range
Setting] of the [ A
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 209 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
HDR Capture
Enables capturing images at high dynamic range. Takes three images
(-3EV underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and +3EV overexposed) to create a single composite image with them.
• HDR Capture is not available in the following situations.
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])
- when the shutter speed is set to h
• When HDR Capture is set, the following functions are not available.
- Continuous Shooting, Exposure Bracketing, Interval Shooting or Multiexposure
- Flash modes other than a (Flash Off)
- Digital Filter or Cross Processing (The function selected last is used)
• During HDR Capture, multiple images are combined together to create a single image, so it will take time to save an image.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select [HDR
Capture] and press the 4 button.
The [HDR Capture] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select [Off], [Auto], [Standard],
[Strong 1], [Strong 2] or [Strong
3].
HDR Capture
Off
HDR HDR HDR
6
209
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
MENU Cancel OK OK
210
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 210 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
6
• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.
• HDR Capture is fixed to [Auto] and [Auto Align] is set to O (On) when the capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode.
• You can set the [HDR Capture] setting from the [ A
HDR Capture you use the menu, you can also set the
[Auto Align] setting.
HDR Capture
Auto Align
P
O
Does not use Shake
Reduction regardless of the
Shake Reduction setting.
(default setting)
Turns Shake Reduction on or off according to the Shake
Reduction setting.
MENU
• When both [Shake Reduction] and [Auto Align] are set to on, be careful of the following points.
- Make sure to hold the camera firmly so that the composition of the picture does not change while the three images are taken. If there is a great difference of the composition between three images, [Auto Align] may not be possible.
- Images taken with HDR Capture are susceptible to camera shake and blur.
Be sure to set a higher shutter speed and a higher ISO sensitivity.
- When the ISO sensitivity is set to AUTO, the sensitivity can be raised more easily than normal.
- [Auto Align] may not be possible for lenses that have a focal length exceeding 100 mm.
- When the entire subject is checkered or has a uniform surface, [Auto Align] may not be possible.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 211 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Lens Correction
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to lens properties.
Distortion
Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched
(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a zoom lens or a small diameter lens, and straight walls or the horizon in the image appear curved.
211
Pincushion distortion Barrel distortion
Lateral chromatic aberration
Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which the magnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengths of light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.
Chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.
6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 212 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
212
6
• Corrections can only be made when using DA, DA L, D FA or some FA lenses
(p.312). [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] cannot be
selected when an incompatible lens is attached.
• [Distortion Correction] is disabled when using a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm.
• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as a close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and the lens.
• The shooting speed for continuous shooting may be slower when the Lens
Correction function is activated.
• The effects of the Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in some cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select [Distortion
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] and press the 4 button.
The [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select [Off] or [On].
Distortion Correction
Off
MENU Cancel OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or
[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you
can select [On] or [Off] when developing the RAW images. (p.262)
• You can also set [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] in [Lens
Correction] of the [ A
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 213 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Image Finishing Tone
213
Setting Custom Image
You can set the image finishing tone before shooting when the capture mode is set to e (Program), K (Sensitivity Priority), b (Shutter Priority), c (Aperture Priority) or a (Manual).
Select from the following nine modes for the image finishing tone: Bright
(default setting), Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film and Monochrome. You can adjust the following parameters for Image Tone.
Parameter
Saturation
Hue
High/Low Key
Adj
Contrast
Sharpness
Filter Effect
Toning
Settings
Sets the color saturation.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] or
[Monochrome] is selected.
Sets the color.
• Not available when [Bleach Bypass],
[Reversal Film] or [Monochrome] is selected.
Changes the brightness of the image.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] is selected.
Sets the image contrast.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] is selected.
Sets the sharpness of the image outlines.
You can switch to [Fine Sharpness] which makes image outlines even thinner and sharper. Not available when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).
Changes the contrast to appear as if a B&W color filter was used. Set the filter color.
• Available only when [Monochrome] is selected.
Sets a color tone for [Bleach Bypass].
Sets the level for cold tone adjustment
(- direction) and warm tone adjustment
(+ direction) for [Monochrome].
• Available only when [Bleach Bypass] or
[Monochrome] is selected.
Setting Values
–4 to +4
–4 to +4
–4 to +4
–4 to +4
–4 to +4
None/Green/Yellow/
Orange/Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/
Infrared Filter
Bleach Bypass: Off/
Green/Yellow/
Orange/Red/
Magenta/Purple/Blue/
Cyan
Monochrome: –4 to
+4
6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 214 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
214
When Cross Processing is set, the image finishing tone is fixed to [Bright] and the parameters cannot be changed.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four way controller ( 2345 ) to select [Custom
Image] and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a custom image appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the background.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select an image finishing tone.
6
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose a parameter you want to change.
INFO
MENU Cancel Check OK OK
MENU Cancel
INFO
Check OK OK
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to change the setting.
The background image changes according to the settings.
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 215 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Available operations
E-dial
| button m c button
M button
Switches between [Sharpness] and [Fine Sharpness].
When set to [Fine Sharpness], image outlines can be captured with more detail.
Resets the set value. (Available only when [Green
Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the [ A
Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image with the setting applied.
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and press the 4 button. (Not available during Live View.)
6
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also change the settings from the [ A
215
6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 216 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
216
Setting Cross Processing
Cross processing is the procedure of deliberately processing a film in the wrong type of chemicals to create an image with different colors and contrast. This camera features digital cross processing, which is done internally.
• Cross Processing is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])
• When Cross Processing is set, the following functions are not available.
- Multi-exposure
- HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)
- Changing the settings of White Balance and Custom Image
Set the mode dial to C (Movie) when using Cross Processing for movies.
6
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
Set in [Movie] of the [ A Rec. Mode 3] menu when the capture mode is set to C
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select [Cross
Processing] and press the 4 button.
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select [Off], [Preset
1-3], [Random] or [Favorite 1-3].
Cross Processing
Off
OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
MENU Cancel
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 217 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
You can also change the setting from the [ A
Saving the Cross Processing Setting of a Captured Image
The outcome of cross processing varies each time a picture is taken. If you are able to take a cross processed image that you like, you can save the
Cross Processing settings used in that image. A total of 3 Cross
Processing settings can be saved for still pictures and movies.
To save Cross Processing setting for movies, set from [Movie] in the [ A Rec.
Mode 3] menu with the mode dial set to C (Movie).
1
Select [Cross Processing] in the [ A Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save Settings] and press the four-way controller
( 5 ).
Cross Processing
Cross Processing
Save Settings
The camera will search for cross processed images starting from the most recent image taken. (An hourglass icon is displayed while searching.) When a cross
MENU processed image is found, the screen to save the settings appears.
If there are no cross processed images, the message [No cross processed image] appears.
3
Use the e-dial to select a cross processed image.
6
Save as Favorite 1
Save as Favorite 2
Save as Favorite 3
MENU Cancel OK OK
217
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 218 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
218
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as
Favorite 1], [Save as Favorite 2] or [Save as Favorite 3] and press the 4 button.
The settings for the selected image are saved to [Favorite 1 - 3].
5
Press the 3 button twice to finish saving.
6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 219 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
7
Playback Functions
This chapter describes how to use the various playback functions in Playback mode.
Playback Functions Operation ......................... 220
Setting the Playback Display Method .............. 222
Enlarging Images ............................................... 223
Displaying Multiple Images ............................... 224
Playing Back Images Continuously ................. 232
Rotating Images .................................................235
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................236
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ...... 240
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device ......... 242
Exchanging Image Data with Other Devices ... 244
220
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 220 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Playback Functions Operation
Make settings related to playing back images in the playback mode palette or [ Q Playback] menu.
For details on how to use the menus, see “Using the Menus” (p.37).
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in
Playback mode to display the playback mode palette.
You can display the playback mode palette even when a movie is paused.
7
Image Rotation
Item s Image Rotation
D Digital Filter
n Resize
o Cropping
Z Protect u Slideshow
Rotates captured images.
Useful for image playback on
TV and other display devices
MENU Exit OK OK
Function
Rotates images.
Changes the color tone of images, adds softening and slimming effects, or adjusts the brightness.
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the captured image and saves it as a new file.
Cuts out only the desired area of the picture and saves it as a new image.
Page
Protects images from being accidentally erased. p.240
Plays back the images one after another.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 221 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
221 p Index
Item h RAW Development
[ Movie Editing
r DPOF
g Image Comparison
Function
Joins a number of images together and creates a new image with them.
Converts RAW images to JPEG format.
Divides a movie and extracts segments from it. p.171
Sets the DPOF settings.
Displays two images side-by-side.
i j
IrSimple
Dueling Images
Sends or receives image data via infrared transmission.
Images are squared off with those of other
W cameras in this dueling game.
*1 This cannot be performed when a movie is displayed.
*2 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.
*3 This can be performed only when a movie is displayed.
Page
Playback Menu Setting Items
You can perform the following settings in the
[ Q Playback ] menu.
Press the 3 button in Playback mode to display the [ Q Playback 1] menu.
7
Menu
Q 1
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
IrSimple
Item
Delete All Images
Function
Plays back the images one after another.
You can set how images will be displayed in the slideshow.
Sets the initial magnification when enlarging images.
Page
Sets whether or not to display the Bright/
Dark Area warning during playback.
Sets whether to rotate images shot with the camera held vertically when playing back.
Sets infrared transmission settings and sends or receives data via infrared transmission.
You can delete all saved images at once. p.239
222
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 222 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Playback Display Method
7
You can set the initial magnification when enlarging images, whether to display the Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to automatically rotate images that are shot with the camera held vertically in Playback mode.
1
Select [Quick Zoom] in the [ Q Playback 1] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the magnification and press the 4 button.
Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],
[×4], [×8] or [×16].
1
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
IrSimple
Delete All Images
O f f
X2
X4
X8
X16
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Bright/Dark Area], and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
1
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
IrSimple
Delete All Images
O f f
MENU Exit
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Auto Image
Rotation], and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select
O or P .
O
During playback, the image is automatically rotated based on the
rotation information when [18. Saving Rotation Info] in the [
A Custom
Setting 3] menu (p.90) is set to [On]. (default setting)
P The image is not automatically rotated during playback.
5
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 223 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Enlarging Images
Images can be magnified up to 16 times in Playback mode.
1
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select an image in Playback mode.
2
Turn the e-dial to the right
(toward y ).
The image enlarges at each click (1.2 times to 16 times).
JPEG 1/ 2000 F5.6
ISO 200
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 2345 )
E-dial to the right ( y )
E-dial to the left ( f )
4 button
M button
Moves the area to enlarge.
Enlarges the image (up to 16 times).
Reduces the image (up to 1.2 times*).
Returns to the original size.
Switches information display On/Off.
* The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You can change this in [Quick Zoom] of the [ Q
• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during Instant
Review (p.71), Digital Preview (p.140) or Live View (p.163).
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of
0.675 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click starts at 1.0 times.
7
223
224
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 224 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Displaying Multiple Images
Multi-image Display Screen
You can display 4, 9, 16, 36 or 81 thumbnail images on the monitor at the same time. The default setting is nine image-display.
1
Turn the e-dial to the left (toward f ) in Playback mode.
7
The multi-image display screen appears.
Up to nine thumbnail images will be displayed at once.
Selection frame
INFO 100-0001
Scroll bar
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 225 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Available operations
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
M button
Moves the selection frame
Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting] screen. Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select the number of images to display at the same time.
225
Multi-img Display Setting
Display Type
MENU Cancel INFO OK OK
(Display Type cannot be selected when developing
Selects multiple images and deletes them. (p.236)
K / i button
2
Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
Icons such as C and ?
are not displayed with thumbnail images for 81-image display.
7
Displaying Images by Folder
Images will be grouped and displayed by folder in which they are saved.
1
In the multi-image display screen, turn the e-dial to the left
(toward f ) again.
The folder display screen appears.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 226 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
226
2
Select the folder you want to display.
100 101
12345
102
103 104 105
100_0105
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 2345 )
K / i button
Moves the selection frame.
Deletes the selected folder and all
3
Press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.
7
Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar
Display)
Images will be grouped and displayed by the shooting date.
1
In the multi-image display screen, press the M button.
The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen appears.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 227 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Press the M button again.
Multi-img Display Setting
Display Type
MENU Cancel INFO OK OK
The calendar display screen appears.
Only the dates when pictures were taken are displayed.
Number of images shot on this date
2/5
2010.
WED
9
22
FRI
MON
24
27
2010.
10
THU 7
10
WED
SAT
13
16
Delete INFO
Shooting date Thumbnail
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 23 )
Four-way controller ( 45 )
E-dial to the right ( y )
M button
Selects a shooting date.
Selects an image taken on the selected shooting date.
Displays the selected image. Turn to the left
( f ) to return to the calendar display.
The camera returns to the multi-image display screen.
Deletes selected images.
K / i button
3
Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
7
227
228
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 228 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Comparing Images
You can display two images side-by-side.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select g (Image
Comparison) and press the 4 button.
The last image displayed will be displayed twice side-by-side.
3
Select two images you want to compare using the e-dial and compare them at left and right.
7
MENU OK
Available operations
4 button
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
| button
E-dial
M button
K / i button
Moves the selection frame to the right image, both images, and left image each time the button is pressed.
Moves the area to enlarge. When the selection frame is placed on both images, you can manipulate both images at the same time.
Returns a position of the enlarged display area to the center.
When the selection frame is placed on the left or right image, the previous or next image is displayed.
When the selection frames are placed on both images, you can enlarge or reduce both images simultaneously in the same magnification.
Switches information display On/Off.
When the selection frame is placed on the left or right image, the selected image is deleted.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the normal playback mode.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 229 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Joining Multiple Images (Index)
Join a number of images together and display them as an index print. You can also save the displayed index print as a new image. You can select the images to include in the index print and have them randomly-arranged.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select p (Index) and press the 4 button.
The [Index] screen appears.
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select a layout and press the
Index
4 button.
Layout
Images
You can select o (Thumbnail), p (Square), q (Random1), r (Random2), s (Random3) or p (Bubble).
Backgrnd.
Selection
Create an index image
MENU Cancel OK OK
Images are displayed according to the file number (from the smallest number) for o , and are displayed in random order for other layouts.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Images] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the number of images and press the 4 button.
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.
When the number of saved images is smaller than the number selected, empty spaces will appear when [Layout] is set to o and some images may be duplicated for other layouts.
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
12
24
36
Create an index image
MENU Cancel OK OK
7
229
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 230 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
230
7
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Backgrnd.] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
8
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the background color and press the 4 button.
You can select a white or black background.
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
12
Create an index image
MENU Cancel OK OK
9
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Selection] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
10
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select a type of image selection and press the 4 button.
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
12
MENU
Create an index image
Cancel OK OK u All images w Manual x Folder name
Picks images automatically from all of the images saved.
Individually select images you want to include in the index. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)] and select the individual images.
Picks images automatically from the folder selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder] and select the folder.
11
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Create an index image] and press the 4 button.
The index image is created and a confirmation screen appears.
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
12
Create an index image
MENU OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 231 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
12
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save] or [Reshuffle] and press the 4 button.
Save
Reshuffle
Cancel
MENU OK OK
Save
Reshuffle
The index image is saved as a P and C file.
Reselects the images to be included in the index and displays a new index image. However, if [Thumbnail] is selected for [Layout], this item is not displayed.
After the index image is saved, the camera returns to Playback mode and the index image is displayed.
Processing may take a while when creating an index image.
231
7
232
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 232 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Playing Back Images Continuously
You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card successively in the slideshow.
7
Setting the Slideshow Display
Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.
1
Select [Slideshow] in the [ Q Playback 1] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select an item you want to change.
Slideshow starts
Start
The following items can be changed.
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
3sec.
MENU OK OK
Item
Interval
Screen
Effect
Repeat
Playback
Description
Select an image display interval.
Select a transition effect when the next image is displayed.
Set whether to start the slideshow again from the beginning after the last image is displayed.
Setting
3sec. (default setting)/
5sec./10sec./30sec.
Off (default setting)/Fade/
Wipe/Stripe
P (default setting)/ O
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 233 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to change the setting and press the 4 button.
Start
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
MENU Cancel
3sec.
5sec.
10sec.
30sec.
OK OK
233
Starting the Slideshow
1
Select [Start] in Step 2 on p.232 and press the
4 button.
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the playback mode palette and press the 4 button.
The start screen is displayed and the slideshow begins.
Start
OK
7
Available operations
4 button
Four-way controller ( 4 )
Four-way controller ( 5 )
Four-way controller ( 3 )
Pauses playback. Press again to resume playback.
Shows the previous image.
Shows the next image.
Stops playback.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 234 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
234
2
Stop the slideshow.
Slideshow ends when one of the following operations is performed during playback or pause.
- the four-way controller ( 3 ) is pressed
- the Q
- the 3 button is pressed
- the shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully
- the = / L button is pressed
*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.
For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is displayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play a movie during a slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After the movie has finished playing, the slideshow will resume.
7
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 235 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Rotating Images
You can rotate an image counterclockwise in 90° increments at a time and save the rotated image. The image rotation information is saved with the image and during playback it will be displayed in portrait orientation.
• When [18. Saving Rotation Info] in the [
A
Custom Setting 3] menu (p.90) is
set to [Off], the image rotation information is not saved when shooting.
• When [Auto Image Rotation] (p.222) in the [
Q Playback 1] menu is set to
O (On), the image with rotation information is automatically rotated during playback.
You cannot change the image rotation information in the following conditions.
- when the image is protected
- when the image rotation information is not saved with the image
- when [Auto Image Rotation] (p.222) in the [
Q Playback 1] menu is set to
P (Off)
1
Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select s (Image
Rotation) and press the 4 button.
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail images are displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select a desired rotation direction and press the
4 button.
The image rotation information is saved.
MENU Cancel OK OK
7
235
236
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 236 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Deleting Multiple Images
Deleting Selected Images
You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.
Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted.
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.
1
Turn the e-dial to the left (toward f ) in Playback mode.
The multi-image display screen appears.
7 2
Press the K / i button.
The screen to select the images to delete is displayed.
The screen temporarily changes to 36- image display when [Multi-img Display
Setting] (p.224) is set to 81-image
display.
INFO 100-0001
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 237 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Select the images to delete.
MENU Delete OK
Available operations
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
4 button
Moves the selection frame
E-dial
Adds O and selects an image. Press again to return to P . Protected images ( Z ) cannot be selected.
Displays a full screen display of the image selected with the selection frame. When the image is displayed full screen, press the four-way controller
( 45 ) to display the previous or next image.
4
Press the K / i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
5
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Select & Delete].
All selected images will be deleted
Select & Delete
Cancel
MENU OK OK
6
Press the 4 button.
The selected images are deleted.
7
237
238
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 238 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Deleting a Folder
You can delete a selected folder and all the images in it.
1
Turn the e-dial two clicks to the left (toward f ) in Playback mode.
The folder display screen appears.
7
2
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select a folder to delete and press the K / i button.
The delete folder confirmation screen appears.
100
103
101
104
12345
102
105
100_0105
3
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Delete].
100_0105
All images in selected folder will be deleted
Delete
Cancel
OK OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The selected folder and all images in it are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Use the fourway controller ( 23 ) to select [Delete All] or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected images are also deleted.
3image(s)
Protected images are found
Delete All
Leave All
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 239 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Deleting All Images
You can delete all saved images at once.
Deleted images cannot be restored.
1
Select [Delete All Images] in the [ Q Playback 1] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Delete All Images].
All images will be deleted from memory
Delete All Images
Cancel
OK OK
3
Press the 4 button.
All images are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Use the fourway controller ( 23 ) to select [Delete All] or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected images are also deleted.
3image(s)
Protected images are found
Delete All
Leave All
OK OK
7
239
240
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 240 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Protecting Images from Deletion
(Protect)
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is formatted.
7
Protecting a Single Image
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select
Z (Protect) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the protection setting method is displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select [Single Image] and press the 4 button.
Single Image
All Images
MENU OK OK
4
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select an image to protect.
5
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Protect].
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the protection of the image.
Protect
Unprotect
MENU OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 241 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
6
Press the 4 button.
The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of the screen.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to protect other images.
7
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to Playback mode.
241
Protecting All Images
1
Select [All Images] in Step 3 on p.240 and press the
4 button.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Protect] and press the
4 button.
All images saved on the SD Memory Card are protected.
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the protection of all images.
MENU
Protects all images
Protect
Unprotect
OK OK
7
242
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 242 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Connecting the Camera to an AV
Device
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video input terminal and play back images. Use the optional AV cable I-AVC7.
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the AV cable toward the 2 mark on the camera, and connect the cable to the PC/AV terminal.
7 3
Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video input terminal on the AV device.
4
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC
adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) is recommended. (p.50)
• For an AV device with multiple video input terminals, check the operating manual of the AV device, and select a suitable video input terminal for connecting the camera.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera while the camera is connected to the AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 243 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Selecting the Video Output Format
When the hometown is set at the time of initial setting (p.60), the video
output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video output format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.
1
Select [Video Out] in the [ R Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [NTSC] or [PAL] and press the 4 button.
1 2 3 4
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
MENU Cancel
±0
NTSC
Date
OK OK
3
Press the 3 button.
The video output format is set.
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting
the Time] in the World Time setting (p.270) to
X (Destination), the video output setting changes to the video output format for that city.
7
243
244
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 244 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Exchanging Image Data with Other
Devices
This camera features infrared transmission (IrSimple/IrSS) which allows you to send image data to cell phones and printers, as well as play a dueling game with other W cameras.
Sending and Receiving Image Data via
Infrared Transmission
Send and receive image data to and from other W cameras and other devices that support infrared transmission, such as cell phones.
• Do not block the infrared port during infrared transmission.
• Infrared transmission may not operate properly if the infrared port is dirty.
When necessary, clean the port with a soft dry cloth.
• Data may not be properly transmitted under direct sunlight, directly under a fluorescent light, or near infrared devices.
Only JPEG files can be sent or received.
7
1
To send an image via infrared transmission, first select the image in Playback mode.
2
Select [IrSimple] in the [ Q Playback 1] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [IrSimple] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Automatic
Resizing] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 245 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the number of recorded pixels and press the 4 button.
IrSimple
Send and receive
Automatic Resizing
Transmission Method
2
M
0.3
M
OFF
MENU Cancel OK OK i
Z
When the number of pixels is larger than i , the image is resized to i or less. (default setting)
When the number of pixels is larger than Z , the image is resized to Z or less.
OFF The image is not resized.
5
Change the [Transmission Method] setting as necessary.
Standard (IrSimple)
Bi-directionally exchanges information with the other device. (default setting)
IrSS
Transmits information in only one direction and does not accept any answers or requests for resending from the other device.
Select this setting when specified by the other device.
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Send and receive] and press the 4 button.
The screen to select either to send or receive data appears.
7
Bring the infrared ports of your camera and the other device close together.
Operate infrared transmission on the other device.
Transmission is possible is within a distance of 20 cm, at an emission angle of up to 15 degrees from the center.
7
20 cm
245
15°
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 246 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
246
8
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Send] or [Receive] and press the 4 button.
IrSimple
[Sending] or [Receiving] appears and the data is transmitted.
Do not move the camera until data transmission is complete.
INFO Setting
MENU Exit
When data transmission is successful,
[Send complete] or [Receive complete] appears.
Send
Receive
100-0001
OK OK
You can transmit data from i (IrSimple) in the playback mode palette if the settings for [Automatic Resizing] and [Transmission Method] are not changed.
7
Playing a Dueling Game using Your Images
(Dueling Images)
You can play a game with other W cameras using infrared transmission.
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be used for Dueling
Images.
• Dueling Images uses the IrDA method of infrared transmission regardless of the [IrSimple] setting in the [ Q Playback 1] menu.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select
(Dueling Images) and press the 4 button.
j
The image selection screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to choose an image to use.
MENU
Accept challenge
Issue challenge
Game Score
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 247 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Accept challenge] or [Issue challenge] and press the 4 button.
When your opponent selects [Accept challenge], select [Issue challenge].
[Communication in progress] appears and the data is transmitted.
If the data is transmitted properly, your opponent’s image appears in the right side of the [Prepare Your Image] screen.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the order of parameters to use.
Prepare Your Image
YOU RIVAL
Fighting strength is calculated based on the shooting conditions.
1
2
3
?
?
?
Start
MENU OK OK
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Start] and press the 4 button.
After [Communication in progress] appears, the duel starts.
When the duel is over, the result appears.
Prepare Your Image
YOU
1
2
3
Start
?
?
?
RIVAL
MENU OK OK
7
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the single image display.
And the winner is. . .
YOU RIVAL
Winner
247
7
OK Exit
248
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 248 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• The image sent from the opponent is not saved.
• If you select [Game Score] in Step 3, you can check the number of duels that you have won and lost, and those that ended in a draw. Press the | button in this screen to reset the game score.
• If data transmission is not completed properly or it is interrupted, the message
[Unable to establish data communication] appears.
Win
Lose
Draw
Reset
Game Score
10
200
1
OK OK
7
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 249 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
8
Processing Images
This chapter describes how to process pictures taken and edit RAW images.
Changing the Image Size ...................................250
Processing Images with Digital Filters ............253
Developing RAW Images ...................................259
250
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 250 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Changing the Image Size
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the image, and saves the image as a new file.
8
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and
Quality Level (Resize)
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the selected image and saves it as a new image. The number of recorded pixels can be reduced while still obtaining an image with good quality.
• Only JPEG files captured with this camera can be resized.
• You cannot select a larger resolution than that of the original image.
• Images already resized to Z with this camera cannot be resized.
1
Select an image to resize in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select n (Resize) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select the desired image size.
You can select one of the image sizes starting from one size smaller than that of the original image. The selectable sizes vary according to the original image size and aspect ratio.
12
M
10
M
MENU OK
5
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select the quality level.
You can select C , D or E .
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 251 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The resized image is saved as a new image.
Save as
Cancel
OK MENU
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)
Cuts out only the desired area of the selected image and saves it as a new image. The aspect ratio can also be changed.
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be cropped.
• Images already resized to S or Z with this camera cannot be cropped.
1
Select an image to crop in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select o (Cropping) and press the 4 button.
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop appears on the screen.
8
251
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 252 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
252
4
Specify the size and position of the area to crop by using cropping frame.
Available operations
E-dial
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
M button
MENU INFO
3:2
Changes the size of the cropping frame.
Moves the cropping frame.
Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2],
[4:3], [16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be rotated from -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.
OK
Aspect Ratio
Image Rotation
3:2
±0°
8
MENU
| button Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.
| appears only when the cropping frame can be rotated.
5
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The cropped image is saved as a new image.
Save as
Cancel
MENU OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 253 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Processing Images with Digital
Filters
You can edit captured images using digital filters.
The following filters are available.
Filter name
Toy Camera
Retro
High Contrast
Sketch Filter
Water Color
Pastel
Posterization
Miniature
Base
Parameter
Adj
Monochrome
Effect
Creates an image that looks as though it was shot with a toy camera.
Creates an image with the look of an old photo.
Parameter
Shading Level: +1 to +3
Blur: +1 to +3
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
Frame Composite: None/Thin/Medium/Thick
Enhances the contrast in the image.
Creates an image that looks as though it was drawn with a pencil.
Creates an image that looks as though it was painted.
Creates an image that looks as though it was drawn with a crayon.
Lessens the tone of the image to create an image that looks as though it was hand-drawn.
+1 to +5
Contrast: Low/Medium/High
Scratch Effect: OFF/ON
Intensity: +1 to +3
Saturation: OFF/Low/Medium/High
Weak/Standard/Strong
+1 to +5
Blurs part of the image to create a fake miniature scene.
Adjusts the parameters to create the desired image.
In-Focus Plane: -3 to +3
Width: Narrow/Middle/Wide
Angle: Side/Vertical/Positive Slope/
Negative Slope
Blur: +1 to +3
Brightness: -8 to +8
Saturation: -3 to +3
Hue: -3 to +3
Contrast: -3 to +3
Sharpness: -3 to +3
Creates a monochrome image such as a blackand-white photo.
Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Infrared Filter
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
253
8
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 254 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
254
8
Filter name
Color
Extract Color
Soft
Starburst
Fish-eye
Slim
HDR
Custom Filter
Effect
Adds a color filter to the image. Select from 18 filters (6 colors × 3 tones).
Parameter
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark
Extracts two specific colors and makes the rest of the image black and white.
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 1: -2 to +2
Extracted Color 2: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2: -2 to +2
Soft Focus: +1 to +3 Creates an image with a soft focus throughout the image.
For taking pictures of night scenes or lights reflected on water with a special sparkling look by adding extra glitter to the highlights.
Creates an image that looks as though it was shot with a fish-eye lens.
Changes the horizontal and vertical ratio of images.
Creates an image that looks like a high dynamic range image.
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/Heart/
Musical Note
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
Weak/Medium/Strong
-8 to +8
Weak/Medium/Strong
Customize and save a filter to your own preferences.
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 255 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be edited using the
Digital Filter.
255
Applying the Digital Filter
1
Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select D (Digital
Filter) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a filter appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to select a filter and press the 4 button.
After selecting a filter, you can check the effect on the screen.
You can select a different image by turning the e-dial.
MENU Exit OK OK
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select a parameter and the four-way controller ( 45 ) to adjust the value.
8
MENU
Color Filter
OK MENU
Slim Filter
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 256 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
256
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Use filters in combination] or [Save as].
Select [Use filters in combination] when you want to apply additional filters to the same image.
Use filters in combination
Save as
Cancel
MENU OK OK
8
Press the 4 button.
If [Use filters in combination] was selected, the camera returns to Step 4.
If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a new image.
Up to 20 filters, including a digital filter used during shooting (p.155), can be
combined to the same image.
8
Recreating Filter Effects
Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and apply the same filter effects to other images.
1
Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.
2
Select D (Digital Filter) in the playback mode palette.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 257 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Recreating filter effects] and press the 4 button.
The history of the filter set for the selected image appears.
Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
Searching for the original image
MENU OK OK
4
To check the parameter details, press the M button.
You can check the filter parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
MENU
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
INFO Details
13.
14.
15.
16.
17. - -
18. - -
19. - -
20. - -
OK OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select an image for applying the same filter effects and press the 4 button.
You can only select an image that has not been processed with a filter.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The filter-processed image is saved as a new image.
MENU
Save as
Cancel
OK OK
MENU OK OK
257
8
258
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 258 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Searching for the Original Image
Searches for and displays the original image prior to digital filter application.
1
Select [Searching for the original
press the 4 button.
The original image prior to digital filter application is retrieved.
Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
Searching for the original image
MENU OK OK
If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message
[Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.
8
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 259 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Developing RAW Images
You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG files.
Only RAW files captured with this camera can be edited. RAW files and JPEG files captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.
Developing One RAW Image
1
Select a RAW image in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select h (RAW
Development) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a development method is displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Developing a Single
Image] and press the 4 button.
Developing a Single Image
Developing Multiple Images
8
MENU
The parameters recorded in the image file appear.
You can select a different image by turning the e-dial.
To specify the parameters before
developing, refer to “Specifying the
RAW JPEG
MENU OK
OK OK
12
M
ISO
NR
100-0001
259
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 260 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
260
5
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.
RAW JPEG
Saves the image as a new file
Save as
Cancel
MENU OK OK
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Continue] or [Exit].
Select [Continue] to edit other images.
Image developed and stored.
Continue developing?
Continue
Exit
OK OK
8
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Continue] in Step 7, the screen for selecting the parameter in Step 4 appears again.
8
Developing Multiple RAW Images
You can develop multiple RAW images with the same settings.
1
Select [Developing Multiple Images] in Step 4 on p.259 and
press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen appears.
Refer to p.224 for details on operations in the multi-image display screen.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select the RAW images to be developed and press the 4 button.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 261 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Press the M button.
The development confirmation screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Develop images as shot] or [Develop images with modified settings].
To change parameters, select [Develop images with modified settings]. For
details, refer to “Specifying the
The screen to select a parameter appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
( 2345 ) to set [Recorded
Pixels] and [Quality Level].
MENU
Develop images as shot
Develop images with modified settings
RAW JPEG
OK OK
12
M
OK MENU
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The selected RAW images are developed and saved as new images.
RAW JPEG
Selected images are saved as new files
Save as
Cancel
MENU OK OK
8
261
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 262 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
262
8
Specifying the Parameters
Specify the parameters for developing RAW images.
The following parameters can be changed.
Parameter
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Custom Image
White Balance
Sensitivity
High-ISO NR
Shadow Correction
Distortion Correction
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
Color Space
Value
E (4288×2848)/ J (3936×2624)/
P (3072×2048)/ i (1728×1152)
C (Best) / D (Better) / E (Good)
Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/Vibrant/
Muted/Bleach Bypass/Reversal Film/
Monochrome
F (Auto)/ G (Daylight)/ H (Shade)/
^ (Cloudy)/ J D (Fluorescent Light Daylight
Color)/ J N (Fluorescent Light Daylight
White)/ J W (Fluorescent Light Cool White)/
J L (Fluorescent Light Warm White)/
I (Tungsten Light)/ L (Flash)/ f /
K (Manual)
-2.0 to +2.0
Auto/Off/Low/Medium/High
Off/Low/Medium/High
Off/On
Off/On sRGB/AdobeRGB
*1 This cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.
*2 This can be selected only when a compatible lens is attached. (p.211)
Page
–
1
Press the four-way controller
( 23
choose the parameter you want to change.
RAW JPEG
12
M
ISO
NR
MENU OK 100-0001
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 263 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to change the value.
Use the four-way controller ( 5 ) to display the setting screen for White
Balance and Custom Image.
3
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Save as] and press the 4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.
• You cannot save the background image and use Digital Preview with White
Balance and Custom Image.
• When the white balance is set to K (Manual), press the m c button to display the measuring screen.
263
8
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 264 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
264
Memo
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 265 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
9
Changing Additional
Settings
This chapter describes how to change additional settings.
How to Operate the Set-up Menu ...................... 266
Formatting an SD Memory Card ....................... 268
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display
Language ............................................................ 269
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display ..274
Setting the Folder/File Number ......................... 279
Selecting the Power Settings ............................ 281
Setting the Photographer Information ............. 283
Setting the DPOF Settings ................................ 285
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS
Sensor (Pixel Mapping) ..................................... 287
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera
(Memory) ............................................................. 288
266
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 266 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
How to Operate the Set-up Menu
Perform general settings related to the camera in the [ R Set-up] menu.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.37).
9
Set-up Menu Setting Items
Perform the following settings in the [ R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) or e-dial to display the [ R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Menu
R
R
1
2
Item
Language/ u
Date Adjustment
World Time
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Function
Changes the language in which menus and messages appear.
Sets the date format and time.
Sets the display of the local date and time of the specified city so they can be displayed on the monitor in addition to the present location when traveling overseas.
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
Sets the text size of an item selected on the respective menu screens.
Switches the beep tone on/off and changes its volume.
Sets whether to display indicators on the monitor.
Sets the display color of the status screen and control panel.
Brightness Level Changes the brightness of the monitor.
LCD Color Tuning Adjusts the color of the monitor.
Sets the output format when connecting to an AV device with a video input terminal.
Sets the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer.
Sets the naming system of the folder for storing images.
Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 267 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
267
Menu
R
R
R
2
3
4
AA Battery Type
Reset
Pixel Mapping
Sensor Cleaning
Format
Item
Create New Folder
Copyright
Information
Auto Power Off
Dust Alert
Dust Removal
Function
Creates a new folder on the SD Memory
Card.
Sets the photographer and copyright information embedded in Exif.
Sets the time until the camera turns off automatically.
Selects the type of AA batteries used for the camera.
Resets all settings.
Maps out and corrects any defective pixels in the CMOS sensor.
Detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor.
Cleans the CMOS sensor by shaking it.
Locks the mirror in the up position for cleaning the CMOS sensor with a blower.
Formats an SD Memory Card.
Page
[ R Set-up 1] menu
1 2 3 4
English
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
MENU Exit
Standard
3sec.
[ R Set-up 2] menu
1 2 3 4
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
MENU Exit
±0
NTSC
MSC
Date
9
[ R Set-up 3] menu
1 2 3 4
Auto Power Off
AA Battery Type
Reset
1min.
AUTO
MENU Exit
[ R Set-up 4] menu
1 2 3 4
Pixel Mapping
Dust Alert
Dust Removal
Sensor Cleaning
Format
MENU Exit
268
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 268 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Formatting an SD Memory Card
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.
Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be damaged and become unusable.
• Formatting deletes all data, either protected or unprotected. Be aware.
1
R Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Format] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Format].
Format
All data will be deleted
Format
Cancel
OK OK
9
3
Press the 4 button.
Formatting starts.
When formatting is completed, the screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
When an SD Memory Card is formatted, the volume label assigned to the card is “K-r”. When the W is connected to a computer, the SD Memory Card is
recognized as a removable disk with the name “K-r”. (p.294)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 269 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and
Display Language
269
Setting the Beep
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off, or change its volume.
By default, all available items are set to O (On), and the volume level is set to [3]. The following six items can be set.
• In-focus
• AE-L (AE Lock operation sound)
• Self-timer
• Remote Control
• One Push File Format (operation sound when [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | button)
• Press OK for 1 sec. (operation sound when changing AF point is enabled or disabled)
1
Select [Beep] in the [ R Set-up 1] menu and press the fourway controller ( 5 ).
The [Beep 1] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to adjust the volume.
Select from six levels. When set to 0, you can turn all the beeps off.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select an item.
Beep
Volume
1 2
Turn the e-dial to display the [Beep 2] screen.
In-focus
AE-L
Self-timer
Remote Control
One Push File Format
MENU
4
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O (On) or
P (Off).
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
9
270
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 270 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Changing the Date and Time Display
You can change the initial date and time settings, and set their display formats. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd] for the date display format, and [12h] (12-hour display) or [24h] (24-hour display) for the time display format.
Set in [Date Adjustment] of the [ R Set-up 1]
Date Adjustment
Date Format 24h
1
Setting the Date and Time (p.64)
Date 01 / 01 / 2010
Time
Settings complete
MENU Cancel
9
Setting the World Time
The date and time selected in “Initial Settings” (p.60) serve as the date and
time of your present location.
Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.
1
R Set-up 1] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [World Time] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select X (Destination) or W
(Hometown) for [Setting the
Time].
World Time
Setting the Time
Destination
London
This setting is reflected on the date and time that appear in the guide display and control panel.
Hometown
New York
MENU
3
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ).
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 271 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [ X Destination] screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select a destination city.
Turn the e-dial to change the region.
The location, time difference and current time of the selected city appear.
Destination
London
DST
MENU Cancel
+06:00
16:00
OK OK
6
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) to select [DST].
7
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O (On) or
P (Off).
Select O if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).
8
Press the 4 button.
The destination setting is saved and the camera returns to the [World
Time] screen.
9
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.272) for cities that can be selected as
a destination.
• Select W (Hometown) in Step 2 to set the city and DST setting.
• X appears in the guide display and control panel if [Setting the Time] is set to X
• When you switch [Setting the Time] to X (Destination), the video output
(p.243) setting changes to the video output format for that city.
271
9
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 272 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
272
9
List of World Time Cities
Region
North
America
Central and
South
America
Europe
Sao Paulo
Rio de Janeiro
Lisbon
Madrid
London
Paris
Amsterdam
Milan
Rome
Copenhagen
Berlin
Prague
Stockholm
Budapest
Warsaw
Athens
Helsinki
Moscow
City
Honolulu
Anchorage
Vancouver
San Francisco
Los Angeles
Calgary
Denver
Chicago
Miami
Toronto
New York
Halifax
Mexico City
Lima
Santiago
Caracas
Buenos Aires
Region
Africa/
West Asia
East Asia
City
Dakar
Algiers
Johannesburg
Istanbul
Cairo
Jerusalem
Nairobi
Jeddah
Tehran
Dubai
Karachi
Kabul
Male
Delhi
Colombo
Kathmandu
Dacca
Yangon
Bangkok
Kuala Lumpur
Vientiane
Singapore
Phnom Penh
Ho chi Minh
Jakarta
Hong Kong
Beijing
Shanghai
Manila
Taipei
Seoul
Tokyo
Guam
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 273 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Region
Oceania
City
Perth
Adelaide
Sydney
Noumea
Wellington
Auckland
Pago Pago
Setting the Display Language
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc. are displayed.
The camera supports the following languages: English, French, German,
Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish,
Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
Set in [Language/ u ] of the [
R Set-up 1]
1
Setting the Display Language (p.60)
273
MENU Cancel OK OK
9
274
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 274 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu
Display
Setting the Text Size
You can set the text size of an item selected on the respective menu screens to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).
R Set-up 1] menu
1 2 3 4
English
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
MENU Cancel
Standard
Large
3sec.
OK OK
9
Setting the Guide Display Time
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when
the camera is turned on or the Capture mode is changed. (p.24)
Select from [3 sec.] (default setting), [10 sec.], [30 sec.] and [Off].
Set in [Guide Display] of the [
R Set-up 1]
1 2 3 4
English
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
MENU Cancel
3sec.
10sec.
30sec.
Off
OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 275 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed
Set the initial menu tab displayed on the monitor when the 3 button is pressed.
1
Select [19. Save Menu Location] in the [
A Custom Setting
3] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [19. Save Menu Location] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Reset Menu Location] or [Save Menu Location] and press the 4 button.
19.
Save Menu Location
1
2
Reset Menu Location
Save Menu Location
Pressing the menu button accesses the last used menu tab
MENU Cancel OK OK
1 Reset Menu Location
The [ A Rec. Mode 1] menu ([ Q Playback
1] menu in Playback mode) is always displayed first. (default setting)
2 Save Menu Location The menu tab last selected is displayed first.
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
275
9
276
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 276 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Status Screen Display
You can set the display color of the status screen and control panel.
1
Select [Status Screen] in the [ R Set-up 1] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Status Screen] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select from six display colors.
Status Screen
Display Color 1
1/ 125
F 5.6
MENU
3
Press the 3 button twice.
The display color of the status screen and control panel are changed.
9
Setting the Display for Instant Review
You can set the Instant Review display settings.
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [ A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Instant Review] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 5 ) and use the four-way controller
( 23 ) to select a display time.
Instant Review
Display Time
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review
1sec.
3sec.
5sec.
Off
MENU Cancel OK OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 277 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Histogram],
[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge Instant Review].
5
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
When [Enlarge Instant Review] is set to O (default setting), you can
magnify the image with the e-dial. (p.223)
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
277
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust the settings when the monitor is hard to see.
1
Select [Brightness Level] in the [
R Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Brightness Level] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to adjust the brightness.
You can select from 15 brightness levels.
The value is reset to ±0 when the | button is pressed.
Brightness Level
±0 MENU Cancel OK OK
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
9
278
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 278 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor
You can adjust the color of the monitor.
1
Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [ R Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.
2
Adjust the color.
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available on the G-M and B-A axes.
9
±0 ±0
MENU Cancel ±0 OK OK
Available operations
Four-way controller ( 23 ) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G) and magenta (M).
Four-way controller ( 45 ) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B) and amber (A).
| button Resets the adjustment value.
E-dial Displays a saved image in the background so you can adjust the color while viewing the image. This is useful for matching the color of the monitor with that of a computer.
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 279 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Folder/File Number
Changing the Naming System of the Folder
You can select a naming system of the folder for storing images.
Date
PENTX
The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is a sequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day) appears according to the display style set in [Date Adjustment]
Example) 101_0125: Folder for images taken on January 25th
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].
Example) 101PENTX
R Set-up 2]
1 2 3 4
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
MENU Cancel
±0
NTSC
MSC
Date
PENTX
OK OK
Creating New Folders
Creates a new folder on an SD Memory Card. A folder is created with the number following the number of the folder currently being used.
1
Select [Create New Folder] in the [ R Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Create New Folder] screen appears.
9
279
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 280 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
280
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Create folder] and press the 4 button.
A folder with a new number is created.
Create New Folder
Creates a new storage folder with the following name:
101 PENTX
Create folder
Cancel
OK OK
Only one folder can be created using this operation. Multiple empty folders cannot be created consecutively.
9
Selecting the File Number Setting
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when
saved to a new folder. Set in [File No.] in [Memory] (p.288) of the [
A Rec.
Mode 4] menu.
O
P
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved and subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a new folder is created.
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001 each time a new folder is created for saving images.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Exposure Bracketing shooting, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the number of images exceeds 500.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 281 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Selecting the Power Settings
281
Setting the Auto Power Off Function
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain length of time. Select from [1 min.] (default setting), [3 min.], [5 min.],
[10 min.], [30 min.] or [Off].
Set in [Auto Power Off] of the [
R Set-up 3]
1 2 3 4
Auto Power Off
AA Battery Type
Reset
1min.
3min.
5min.
10min.
30min.
Off
MENU Cancel OK OK
• The Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.
- when the Live View image is displayed
- when the slideshow is played back
- when the camera is connected to a computer with an USB cable
• If the camera turns off after the set length of time, perform one of the following operations to reactivate it.
- Turn on the camera again.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
- Press the Q button, the 3 button, or the M button.
9
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 282 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
282
9
Setting the Battery Type
Sets the type of AA batteries used in the camera. The default setting is
[Auto-detect].
1
Select [AA Battery Type] in the [ R Set-up 3] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [AA Battery Type] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select a battery type and press the 4 button.
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will automatically detect the type of batteries being used.
1 2 3 4
Auto Power Off
AA Battery Type
1min.
AUTO
Li
Ni-MH
AL
Auto-detect
Lithium
Nickel-Metal Hydride
Alkaline
MENU Cancel OK OK
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
When the type of batteries being used is different from the item you selected, the battery level will not be correctly determined. Make sure that the correct battery type is selected in the [AA Battery Type] setting. Usually, there is no problem using [Auto-detect]. However in low temperatures and when using batteries that were stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate battery type so the camera can correctly determine the remaining battery level.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 283 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the Photographer Information
283
The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are automatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You can embed photographer information in this Exif.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software (p.298) to check
the Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright Information] in the [ R Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
O
P
Embeds copyright information in the
Exif.
Does not embed copyright information in the Exif. (default setting)
Copyright Holder
MENU
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Photographer] and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The text-entry screen appears.
9
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 284 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
284
9
4
Enter the text.
Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols can be entered.
Text selection cursor
Photographer
F i n i s h
Text input cursor
Delete One Character
MENU Cancel OK Enter
Available operations
Four-way controller
( 2345 )
E-dial
| button
4 button
K / i button
Moves the text selection cursor.
Moves the text input cursor.
Switches between upper and lower case letters.
Enters a character selected with the text selection cursor at the position of the text input cursor.
Deletes a character at the position of the text input cursor.
5
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to [Finish] and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Copyright
Information] screen.
Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
MENU
6
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Copyright
Holder] and enter the text in the same way as
[Photographer].
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 285 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Setting the DPOF Settings
You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory
Card with recorded images to a store for printing.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the number of copies and whether to imprint the date.
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images and movies.
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.
1
Press the four-way controller ( 3 ) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 2345 ) to select r (DPOF) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Single Image] or [All
Images] and press the 4 button.
Single Image
All Images
MENU OK OK
4
When [Single Image] is selected in Step 3, use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select an image to set DPOF settings.
MENU
Copies 00 Date
OK
9
285
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 286 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
286
5
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select the number of copies.
You can set up to 99 copies.
K appears at the top right of the screen for images with DPOF settings.
To cancel the DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00].
6
Turn the e-dial to select O or P for printing the date.
O The date will be printed.
P The date will not be printed.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to make DPOF settings for other images (up to 999).
MENU
Copies 01 Date
OK
7
Press the 4 button.
The DPOF settings for the selected image is saved and the camera returns to Playback mode.
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab, the date may not be printed on the pictures even if the date for DPOF setting is set to O .
• The number of copies specified in the All Images setting applies to all the images, and that specified in the Single Image setting is canceled. Before printing, check that the specified number is correct.
9
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 287 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Correcting Defective Pixels in the
CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)
Pixel Mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting defective pixels in the CMOS sensor.
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [ R Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Pixel Mapping] and press the 4 button.
Defective pixels are mapped and corrected, and the screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Pixel Mapping
Checks the image sensor and corrects defective pixels
Pixel Mapping
Cancel
OK OK
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to activate
Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit K-AC109
(optional) or change to the battery with ample power remaining.
287
9
288
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 288 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Selecting Settings to Save in the
Camera (Memory)
9
You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned off. The following function settings can be saved.
Function Function
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Comp.
Default
Setting
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Shooting Info Display
Playback Info Display
File No.
Default
Setting
P
P
P
P
O
O
1
Select [Memory] in the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Memory 1] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to choose an item.
Turn the e-dial to display the [Memory 2] screen.
Memory
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Comp.
MENU
1 2
3
Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O or P .
O Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.
P
Settings are cleared and returned to their default values when the camera is turned off.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 289 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
• Set [File No.] to O (On) to continue the sequential numbering for the file
name even if a new folder is created. Refer to “Selecting the File Number
• When the [ R
Set-up] menu is reset (p.310), all Memory settings return to the
default values.
• If [Shooting Info Display] is set to P (Off), the status screen is always
displayed first when the camera is turned on. (p.26)
289
9
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 290 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
290
Memo
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 291 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
10
Connecting to a
Computer
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to your computer, install the supplied CD-ROM, etc.
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer ............................................................ 292
Saving Images on Your Computer ................... 293
Using the Provided Software ............................ 296
292
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 292 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer
The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by connecting the W using a USB cable and can be managed using the provided software.
We recommend the following system requirements to connect your camera to a computer or to use the software “PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4” included on the CD-ROM (S-SW110).
Windows
OS
Monitor
Others
Windows XP (SP3 or later), Windows Vista, or Windows 7 (can be run as a 32-bit application on any x64 Edition of Windows.)
CPU
RAM
Pentium D 3.0 GHz equivalent or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo processor 2.0 GHz equivalent or higher recommended)
2.0 GB minimum (3.0 GB or more recommended)
Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)
1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended) with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)
USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment
10
Macintosh
OS
CPU
Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5, or 10.6
PowerPC G5 Dual-core 2.0 GHz or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo processor 2.0 GHz or higher recommended. Universal Binary format.)
RAM 2.0 GB minimum (4.0 GB or more recommended)
Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)
Monitor
Others
1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended) with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)
USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 293 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Saving Images on Your Computer
Setting the USB Connection Mode
Set the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer via the provided USB cable (I-USB7). The default setting is [MSC].
1
Select [USB Connection] in the [ R Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
2
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [MSC] or [PTP].
1 2 3 4
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
MENU Cancel
±0
NTSC
MSC
PTP
OK OK
3
Press the 4 button.
The setting is changed.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
293
10
294
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 294 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
MSC and PTP
MSC (Mass Storage Class)
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to the computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard for controlling USB devices with this driver.
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage
Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without installing a dedicated driver.
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP without installing a device driver.
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the W to your computer.
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera and Your Computer
1
Turn your computer on.
2
Turn off your camera and use the provided USB cable to connect your camera and your computer.
10
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 295 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Turn your camera on.
The camera is recognized as a removable disk or an SD Memory Card with a volume label “K-r”.
If the “K-r” dialog appears when the camera is turned on, select [Open folder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK button.
4
Save the captured images to your computer.
Drag and drop the image file(s) or the folder containing the image files in your camera to the hard disk of your computer or the desktop.
5
Disconnect your camera from your computer.
295
10
296
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 296 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Using the Provided Software
“PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” is included on the CD-ROM (S-SW110).
Using the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4, you can manage images saved on your computer, and develop RAW files taken with the W and adjust the color of the images.
Compatible file formats: .bmp (BMP)/.jpg (JPEG)/.pef (files recorded in
PENTAX original RAW format)/.png (PNG)/.tif
(TIFF)/.dng (DNG format RAW file)
10
Installing the Software
You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.
When multiple accounts have been setup on your computer, log on with an account that has administrative rights before installing the software.
1
Turn your computer on.
Make sure no other software is running.
2
Place the CD-ROM (S-SW110) into the CD-ROM drive on your computer.
The [PENTAX Software Installer] screen appears.
If the [PENTAX Software Installer] screen does not appear
• For Windows
1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.
2 Double-click the [CD-ROM drive (S-SW110)] icon.
3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.
• For Macintosh
1 Double-click the CD-ROM (S-SW110) icon on the desktop.
2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 297 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Click [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4].
For Windows, proceed to Step 4.
For Macintosh, follow the instructions on the screen to perform subsequent steps.
4
Select the desired language in the [Choose Setup Language] screen and click [OK].
5
When the [InstallShield
Wizard] screen appears in the selected language, click
[Next].
Follow the instructions on the screen to perform subsequent steps.
297
10
298
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 298 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
When PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 is launched, the following screen
(browser) appears.
The screenshots used in this explanation are for Windows.
Browser tab set (default setting)
You can perform the file management functions such as viewing and organizing the images.
1
2
3 4 3
10
1 Menu Bar
This executes functions or makes various settings.
For Macintosh, the Menu bar appears at the top of the desktop.
2 Tool Bar
Frequently used functions are provided as Tool bar buttons.
5
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 299 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3 Control Panel
Shooting information and settings of the selected image appear in this panel. The set of tab pages displayed in Control Panel can be changed by pressing the Browser, Laboratory and Custom buttons on the Tool bar.
4 File Display Pane
The file list and the images in the selected folder appear here.
5 Status Bar
Information on the selected item appears.
299
Laboratory tab set (default setting)
The control panel for adjusting the image appears here.
10
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 300 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
300
Custom tab set (default setting)
The screen display can be customized here. The Custom tab pages enable you to customize whether to show/hide the various tab pages in accordance with your needs. By default, all tab pages are displayed.
10
Viewing Detailed Information on the Software
Refer to Help for details on using the software program.
1
Click the button on the Tool bar.
Or, select [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility Help] from the [Help] menu.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 301 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Regarding Product Registration
To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.
Click [Product Registration] on the
301
A world map for Internet Product
Registration is displayed. If your computer is connected to the
Internet, click the displayed country or region and then follow the instructions to register your software.
Note that you can only register online if your country or area is shown.
10
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 302 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
302
Memo
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 303 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
11
Appendix
Default Settings .................................................. 304
Resetting the Menus .......................................... 310
Functions Available with Various Lens
Combinations ..................................................... 312
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ............................... 315
Optional Accessories ........................................320
Error Messages .................................................. 325
Troubleshooting .................................................328
Main Specifications ............................................331
Glossary .............................................................. 337
Index ....................................................................342
WARRANTY POLICY .......................................... 348
304
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 304 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Default Settings
The table below shows the factory default settings.
The functions set in Memory (p.288) are saved even when the camera is
turned off.
Reset Setting
Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function
No: The setting is saved even after reset.
Direct Keys
Item Default Setting
Drive Mode
Flash Mode
White Balance
Sensitivity
9 (Single Frame Shooting)
Depends on Capture mode
F (Auto)
AUTO (ISO 200 - 3200)
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
11
[ A Rec. Mode] Menu
Item
Custom Image
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AF Mode
AE Metering
Select AF Point
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Default Setting
Bright
JPEG
E (4288×2848)
C (Best) f
L (Multi-segment) b (5 AF Points)
Off
Not use any filters
Off
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 305 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
305
Item
Multiexposure
Number of Shots
Auto EV Adjustment
Interval
Number of Shots Interval
Shooting Start Interval
Start Time
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Recorded Pixels
Movie
Live View
Quality Level
Sound
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
Movie Aperture Control
Shake Reduction
Autofocus Method
Show Grid
Info Overlay
Histogram
Instant
Review
Bright/Dark Area
Display Time
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review
Highlight Correction D-Range
Setting
Lens
Correction
Shadow Correction
Distortion Correction
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
Color Space
RAW File Format
Default Setting
2 times
P (Off)
1sec.
2 images
Now
12:00AM / 00:00
Auto
Auto b
(1280×720, 16:9)
Yes g (On)
Off
Not use any filters
Fixed l (Off)
Yes
Yes
I (Face Detection AF) Yes
Off
O (On)
P (Off)
P (Off)
1 sec.
P (Off)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
P (Off)
O (On)
Off
Off
Off
Off sRGB
PEF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 306 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
306
11
Green
Button
Green Button
Histogram
Digital
Bright/Dark
Area
Enlarge
Instant
Review
Digital Filter
One Push
File
Cancel after 1 shot
JPEG/
RAW/
RAW+ File
Format
Action in M Mode
E-dial in Program
AF/AE-L Button
Item Default Setting
Green Button
—
—
P (Off)
P (Off)
O (On)
—
—
O (On)
All RAW+
P LINE
P SHIFT
Enable AF1
Memory
Cross Processing, Digital
Filter, HDR Capture,
Shooting Info Display
Other than the above functions
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
P
O
(Off)
(On) k (On)
35 mm
*1 The parameters specified in [Custom Image] are also reset.
*2 The setting returns to [Green Button] after reset.
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 307 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
307
Playback Mode Palette
Item Default Setting
Image Rotation
Digital Filter
Resize
Cropping
Slideshow
RAW Development
Index
Image Comparison
Protect
DPOF
Movie Editing
IrSimple
Dueling Images
—
Toy Camera
Maximum size according to the setting
Maximum size according to the setting
—
File Format: JPEG
Recorded Pixels: E
Quality Level: C
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*1 The parameters specified in [Digital Filter] are also reset.
—
Yes
—
—
—
—
—
No
No
Reset
Setting
—
—
Yes
Page
[ Q Playback] Menu
Item
Slideshow
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
IrSimple
Automatic
Resizing
Transmission
Method
Delete All Images
Default Setting
3 sec.
Off
P (Off)
Off
P (Off)
O (On) i
Standard (IrSimple)
—
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
Yes
—
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 308 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
308
11
[ R Set-up] Menu
Item Default Setting
Language/ u
Date Adjustment
World Time setting
Hometown (City)
World
Time
Hometown (DST)
Destination (City)
According to default setting
According to default setting
W (Hometown)
According to default setting
According to default setting
Same as Hometown
Destination (DST)
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
Volume
Setting
Same as Hometown
According to default setting
3
All O (On)
3 sec.
1
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright
Information
Embed Copyright
Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
According to default setting
P
±0
±0
MSC
Date
—
(Off)
—
—
Auto Power Off
AA Battery Type
Reset
1 min.
Auto-detect
—
Pixel Mapping
Dust Alert
Dust
Removal
Dust Removal
Start-up Action
Sensor Cleaning
Format
—
—
—
P (Off)
—
—
Reset
Setting
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
—
Yes
—
—
No
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 309 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
[ A Custom Setting] Menu
Item
1. EV Steps
2. Sensitivity Steps
3. Expanded Sensitivity
4. Meter Operating Time
5. AE-L with AF Locked
6. Link AE to AF Point
7. Auto Bracketing Order
8. Superimpose AF Area
9. AF.S Setting
10. AF.C Setting
11. AF Assist Light
12. WB When Using Flash
13. AWB in Tungsten Light
14. AF with Remote Control
15. Remote Control in Bulb
16. Release While Charging
17. Flash in Wireless Mode
18. Saving Rotation Info
19. Save Menu Location
20. Catch-in Focus
21. AF Fine Adjustment
22. Using Aperture Ring
Reset Custom Functions
Default Setting
1/3 EV Steps
1 EV Step
Off
10 sec.
Off
Off
0 - +
On
Focus-priority
Focus-priority
On
Auto White Balance
Subtle Correction
Off
Mode1
Off
On
On
Reset Menu Location
Off
Off
Prohibited
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reset
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
*1 The adjustment values can be reset only for [Reset] in the [21. AF Fine Adjustment] screen.
Page
—
309
11
310
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 310 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Resetting the Menus
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up
Menus
Settings in the [ A Rec. Mode] menu, [ Q Playback] menu, [ R Set-up] menu, direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default settings.
Language/ u , Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,
Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [ A Custom Setting] menu settings are not reset.
1
Select [Reset] in the [ R Set-up 3] menu and press the fourway controller ( 5 ).
The [Reset] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Reset
Returns to default settings
Reset
Cancel
OK OK
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 311 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Resetting the Custom Menu
Reset settings in [ A Custom Setting] menu to default values.
1
Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [ A Custom
Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller ( 2 ) to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
Reset Custom Functions
Returns the custom function settings to default values
The settings are reset, and the screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Reset
Cancel
OK OK
311
11
312
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 312 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Functions Available with Various
Lens Combinations
11
Only DA, DA L and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses which have an s
(Auto) position on the aperture ring can be used with factory default
settings. Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for other
lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than s .
z : Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the s position.
# : Some functions are restricted.
× : Functions are unavailable.
Lens
[Mount type]
DA
DA L
D FA
[K
AF
]
[K
AF2
]
[K
AF3
]
FA J
[K
[K
AF
AF2
]
]
F
[K
AF
]
A
[K
A
]
M
P
[K]
Function
Autofocus
(Lens only)
(With AF adapter 1.7×)
Manual focus
(With matte field)
Quick-Shift Focus System
Five AF points/Eleven AF points
Multi-segment metering e (Program) mode
K (Sensitivity Priority) mode b (Shutter Priority) mode c (Aperture Priority) mode a (Manual) mode
P-TTL Auto Flash
Power Zoom
Automatically obtaining the lens focal length information when using the Shake
Reduction function
Lens Correction function
z
– z z
#
z z z z z z z z
– z z z
– z z
× z z z z z z z z
× z
×
z
– z z
– z
×
–
# z z
–
×
×
#
– z z
× × z #
z z z z z
×
× z × z #
z #
z #
z #
z z z z
#
×
–
×
×
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 313 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or faster. Only available at the s position.
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F5.6 or faster.
*3 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.
*4 Aberration correction is available in [Lens Correction] of the [ A Rec. Mode 3] menu. The
[Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using a DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.
*5 Only available with compatible lenses.
*6 To use an FA/F SOFT 85 mm F2.8 lens or FA SOFT 28 mm F2.8 lens, set [22. Using
A Custom Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. Pictures can be taken with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.
*7 Only available with compatible lenses (FA 31mm F1.8 Limited, FA 43mm F1.9 Limited, or
FA 77mm F1.8 Limited).
*8 The focusing area is fixed to O (Spot).
*9 c (Aperture Priority) Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (Adjusting the aperture ring has no effect on the actual aperture value.)
313
Lens names and mount names
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom use the K
AF2
mount. DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler use the K
AF3
mount.
FA single focal length lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses without an ultrasonic motor and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF mount.
Refer to respective lens manuals for details. Note that this camera is not equipped with a power zoom function.
Lenses and accessories that cannot be used with this camera
When the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position or a lens without an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or
auto bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [22. Using
Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [
A Custom Setting 4] menu.
Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for restrictions that
apply.
All camera capture modes are available when using DA/DA L/FA J or lenses with an aperture s position set to the s position.
11
Lens and Built-in Flash
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses not set to the s (Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 314 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
314
Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]
11
When [22. Using Aperture Ring] is set to
[Permitted] in the [ A Custom Setting 4] menu, the shutter can be released even if the aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or A lens is not set to the s (Auto) position or a lens without an s position is attached. However, some features will be restricted as shown below.
22.
Using Aperture Ring
1
2
Prohibited
Permitted
Shutter will release when aperture ring is not set to the
"A" position
MENU Cancel OK OK
Restrictions on using lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than s
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens only or with auto diaphragm accessories such as auto extension tube K)
Lens Used
Exposure
Mode
Restriction c (Aperture
Priority) mode
The aperture remains open regardless of the aperture ring position. The shutter speed changes in relation to the open aperture but an exposure error may occur. In the viewfinder,
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with diaphragm accessories such as extension tube K)
Manual diaphragm lens such as reflex lens (lens only)
FA, F SOFT 85mm, FA
SOFT 28mm (lens only)
All lenses c (Aperture
Priority) mode c (Aperture
Priority) mode
Pictures can be taken with a specified aperture value but an exposure error may occur. In the viewfinder, [F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
c
Priority) mode a
(Aperture
(Manual) mode
Pictures can be taken with a specified aperture value in the manual aperture range. In the viewfinder, [F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
When the depth of field is checked
(Optical Preview), exposure metering starts and the exposure can be checked.
Pictures can be taken with a set aperture value and shutter speed. In the viewfinder, [F--] appears for the aperture indicator. When the depth of field is checked (Optical Preview), exposure metering starts and the exposure can be checked.
If the aperture is set to a position other than s , the camera operates in c
(Aperture Priority) mode regardless of the mode dial setting except when set to a (Manual) or C (Movie) mode.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 315 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor
If the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty, shadows may appear in the image in certain situations such as when shooting against a white background. This indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Removal)
Shaking the CMOS sensor removes dust that has collected.
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the [ R Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.
2
Press the 4 button.
The Dust Removal function is activated by shaking the CMOS sensor.
To activate the Dust Removal function every time the camera is turned on, select
[Start-up Action] and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select O .
When Dust Removal is completed, the camera returns to the [ R Set-up 4] menu.
Dust Removal
Dust Removal
Start-up Action
MENU OK Start
315
11
316
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 316 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Alert)
Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor and visually displays the location of the dust.
You can save an image indicating the dust location and display it when
performing sensor cleaning (p.318).
The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:
- A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA or F lens that has an s (Auto) position is attached.
- The aperture is set to the s position when using a lens with an aperture ring.
- The mode dial is set to any mode other than C (Movie).
- The focus mode lever is set to = .
• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing is complete, dust will not be detected properly.
• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be detected properly.
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30 minutes from the time the image is saved. If more than 30 minutes elapse, save a new Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.
• The Dust Alert image is saved only when an SD Memory Card is inserted.
1
Select [Dust Alert] in the [ R Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Dust Alert] screen appears.
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 317 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
Fully display a white wall or other bright subject with no detail in the viewfinder and press the shutter release button fully.
Dust Alert
Checks for dust on the sensor.
Press shutter release button to reveal dust location
After image processing is performed, the
Dust Alert image appears.
If the message [The operation could not be completed correctly] is displayed,
MENU press the 4 button and take another picture.
3
Check the sensor for dust.
SHUTTER Check
317
OK
Available operations
E-dial/
M button
Displays the Dust Alert image at full screen display.
4
Press the 4 button.
The Dust Alert image is saved and the camera returns to the [ R Set-up
4] menu.
• Regardless of the camera settings, the Dust Alert image will be taken with specific shooting conditions.
• Press the M button or turn the e-dial when the Dust Alert image is displayed to view the sensor area at full screen display.
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 318 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
318
Removing Dust with a Blower
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor with a blower.
Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve a fee.
You can use the optional Imagesensor Cleaning kit O-ICK1 (p.324) when
cleaning the CMOS sensor.
• Do not use a spray type blower.
• Do not clean the sensor when the shutter speed is set to h .
• To prevent dirt and dust from accumulating on the CMOS sensor, keep the lens mount cap on the camera when a lens is not attached.
• When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power remaining to clean sensor] is displayed on the monitor.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when cleaning the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit K-AC109
(optional), please install the battery with ample power remaining. If the battery capacity becomes low during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. In this case, stop cleaning immediately.
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is turned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor and the mirror.
11
• The self-timer lamp blinks while cleaning the sensor.
• This camera features a CMOS sensor corresponding to the shake reduction system, and it may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS sensor. It is not a malfunction.
1
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
2
Turn the camera on.
3
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [ R Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller ( 5 ).
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 319 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
Use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Mirror Up] and press the 4 button.
The mirror is locked in the up position.
If you used Dust Alert to detect dust on the sensor within the last 30 minutes, the
Dust Alert image appears on the monitor.
Clean the sensor while checking the location of the dust.
5
Clean the CMOS sensor.
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a blower with a brush may scratch the
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS sensor with a cloth.
Sensor Cleaning
Raises mirror and opens shutter for access to clean sensor.
Turn the power off to finish
Mirror Up
Cancel
OK OK
6
Turn off the camera.
7
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original position.
319
11
320
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 320 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Optional Accessories
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Contact a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with the camera.
Power Supply Accessories
Battery Charger kit K-BC109 (*)
(Kit includes Battery Charger D-BC109 and AC plug cord.)
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI109 (*)
AC Adapter kit K-AC109
(Kit includes AC Adapter D-AC50, DC Coupler D-DC109 and AC plug cord.)
Lets you power your camera from an AC outlet.
AA battery holder D-BH109
Adapter for using four commercially available AA batteries.
D-BH109
The AC adapter and battery charger are only sold as a kit respectively.
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 321 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Flash Accessories
Auto Flash AF540FGZ
Auto Flash AF360FGZ
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are
P-TTL auto flash units with a maximum guide number of 54 and 36 (ISO 100/m), respectively. Their features include slave-sync flash, contrast-control-sync flash, high-speed sync flash, wireless flash, slow-speed sync and trailing curtain sync flash.
AF540FGZ
321
AF360FGZ
Auto Flash AF200FG
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit with a maximum guide number of 20
(ISO 100/m). It features contrastcontrol-sync flash and slow-speed sync flash when combined with an
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit.
Auto Macro Flash AF160FC
The AF160FC is a flash system especially designed for macro photography to take close, shadowless pictures of small objects. It is compatible with existing TTL auto flash functions and it can be used with a wide range of
PENTAX cameras by using provided adapter rings.
AF200FG
AF160FC
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 322 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
322
Hot Shoe Adapter F
G
Extension Cord F5P
Hot Shoe Adapter F
G
Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F
Use the adapters and cords to use the external flash away from the camera.
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
When using the AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, this large clip is used for setting the external flash on a desk or table.
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
11
For Viewfinder
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
This viewfinder accessory is for magnifying up to approximately 1.18 times.
When the eyecup is attached to the
W with a viewfinder magnification of approximately 0.85 times, the combined magnification becomes approximately
1.0 times, making manual focusing much easier.
Magnifier F
B
This viewfinder accessory is for magnifying the central area of the viewfinder 2×.
You can see the entire view by simply flipping up the accessory from the eyepiece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
Magnifier F B
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 323 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Ref-converter A
This is an accessory that changes the viewfinder viewing angle at 90° intervals. The viewfinder magnification can be switched between 1× and 2×.
Ref-converter A
Diopter correction lens adapter M
This accessory adjusts the diopter.
Install it on the viewfinder.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, choose one of the eight correction of approximately –5 to
+3 m –1 (per meter).
Eyecup F
Q
(*)
ME Viewfinder Cap
Diopter correction lens adapter M
Remote Control
Lets you shoot pictures from within 4 m of the front of the camera.
Remote Control F
323
Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 324 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
324
Camera Case/Strap
Camera Case O-CC84
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)
Hand Strap O-ST991
Hand Strap O-ST992
Free Length Strap O-ST842
Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1
Use this kit to clean the optical parts such as the CMOS sensor and lens of this camera.
Others
Body Mount Cap K
Hot Shoe Cover F
K
(*)
USB Cable I-USB7 (*)
AV Cable I-AVC7
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 325 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Error Messages
325
Error Message
Memory card full
No image
This image cannot be displayed
No card in the camera
Cannot use this card
Memory card error
Card is not formatted
Card is locked
The card is electronically locked
This image cannot be enlarged
This image is protected
Description
The SD Memory Card is full and no more images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or delete unwanted images. (p.52, p.84)
Data may be saved when you perform the following operations.
• Change the file format to JPEG. (p.195)
• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG
Quality setting. (p.192, p.193)
There are no images that can be played back on the SD Memory Card.
You are trying to play back an image in a format not supported by this camera. You may be able to play it back on another brand of camera or your computer.
The SD Memory Card is not inserted in the
The inserted SD Memory Card is not compatible with this camera.
The SD Memory Card has a problem, and image capture and playback are impossible. It may be viewable on a computer but not with this camera.
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is unformatted or has been formatted on another device and is not compatible with this camera.
Use the card after formatting it with this camera.
The write-protect switch on an SD Memory
Card you have inserted is locked. Unlock the
Data is protected by the SD Memory Card security feature.
You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot be enlarged.
You are trying to delete an image that is protected. Remove protection from the image.
11
326
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 326 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
11
Error Message
Battery depleted
Not enough battery power remaining to clean sensor
Not enough battery power remaining to activate Pixel Mapping
Image folder cannot be created
Unable to store image
Settings not stored
The operation could not be completed correctly
No more images can be selected
No image can be processed
This image cannot be processed
The camera failed to create an image
Description
The battery is exhausted. Install a fully charged battery or new AA batteries in the camera.
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery level is insufficient. Install a fully charged battery or new AA batteries, or use the AC
adaptor kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)
Appears during Pixel Mapping if the battery level is insufficient. Install a fully charged battery or new AA batteries, or use the AC
adaptor kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)
The maximum folder number (999) and file number (9999) are being used, and no more images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or format the card. (p.268)
The image could not be saved because of an
SD Memory Card error.
The DPOF settings could not be saved because
SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted
images and perform DPOF setting again. (p.84)
The camera was unable to measure the manual white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try
the operation again. (p.202, p.316)
You cannot select 100 or more images at a time
for Index (p.229) and Select & Delete (p.236).
There are no images that can be processed
using Digital Filter (p.253) or RAW
Appears when you try to perform Resize
(p.250), Cropping (p.251), Digital Filter (p.253),
or RAW Development (p.259) for images
captured with other cameras, or when you try to perform Resize or Cropping for minimum file size images.
The creation of an index print image failed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 327 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Error Message
Camera overheated.
Disabling Live View temporarily to protect circuitry
Cannot start Live View
This function is not available in the current mode
Description
Live View cannot be used because the camera’s internal temperature is too high.
Press the 4 button and try using Live View again when the camera has cooled down.
Appears when Live View is started when [22.
A Custom Setting
4] menu is set to [Prohibited] and the lens aperture ring is set to a position other than s , or a lens without an s position is being used.
You are trying to set a function that is not available when the capture mode is set to
Picture mode, H (Scene) mode or C (Movie) mode.
327
11
328
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 328 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Troubleshooting
11
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting it back in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the battery out and put it back in again. Then, the mirror will retract when the camera is turned on again. After these procedures are done, if the camera operates correctly, it does not require any repairs.
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service center.
Problem
The camera does not turn on
The shutter cannot be released
Autofocus does not work low
Cause
Battery is not installed
Battery is not installed properly
The battery power is
The lens aperture ring is set to other than the s position
Remedy
Check if battery is installed. If not, install a fully charged battery.
Check the orientation of battery.
Re-insert battery according to the +/–
Replace with a charged battery or use the
AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)
Set the lens aperture ring to the s position
(p.104) or select [Permitted] in [22. Using
A Custom Setting 4]
The built-in flash is charging
There is no available space on the SD
Memory Card
Recording
The subject is difficult to focus on
Wait until charging is finished.
Insert an SD Memory Card with available
space or delete unwanted images. (p.52, p.84)
Wait until recording is finished.
Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects that have low contrast (the sky, white walls, etc.), dark colors, intricate designs, rapidlymoving objects or scenery shot through a window or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on another object located at the same distance as your subject, then aim at the target and press the shutter release button fully.
Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.134)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 329 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
329
Problem
Autofocus does not work
The focus cannot be locked
Cause
The subject is not in the focusing area
Remedy
Position the subject in the focus frame in the middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is outside the focusing area, aim the camera at the subject and lock the focus, then compose a picture and press the shutter
Move away from the subject and take a picture.
The subject is too close
The focus mode is set to \
Set the focus mode lever to =
[AF Mode] is set to k
The Capture mode is set to \ in Picture mode, or n , l , R , or Y in H mode.
Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when [AF
Mode] is set to k (including when the k setting is automatically selected in f ). The camera will continue focusing on the subject while the shutter release button is pressed halfway. If there is a subject that you want to focus on, set [AF Mode] to l
(Single mode) and use the focus lock. (p.125)
Set Capture mode to any setting other than
\ (Moving Object) in Picture mode, or n (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap),
R (Kids), or Y (Pet) in H (Scene) mode.
The AE Lock function does not operate
The shutter speed is set to h
Set the shutter speed to any mode other than h
The built-in flash does not discharge
When the flash mode is set to C or
C , the flash will not discharge if the subject is bright
The mode dial is set to a
H
A or
,
mode is set to
K
E
, n , Z , U ,
Set the flash mode to b (Manual Flash
Discharge) or D (Manual Flash+Red-eye
Set mode dial to any setting other than a
Set H (Scene) mode to any mode other than A (Night Scene), K (Sunset), n (Stage Lighting), Z (Night Scene
HDR), U (Candlelight), or E (Museum).
The power zoom system does not work
The camera does not have the power zoom function
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 330 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
330
Problem
The USB connection with a computer does not work properly
Cause Remedy
The USB connection mode is set to [PTP]
Set [USB Connection] in the [ R Set-up 2]
Shake
Reduction does not work
The Shake
Reduction function is off
Set [Shake Reduction] to on. (p.142)
The Shake
Reduction function is not set properly
If a lens for which the focal length information cannot be obtained is used, set the focal length in the [Input Focal Length]
Shutter speed is too low for the Shake
Reduction function to be effective when panning or shooting night scenes, etc.
The subject is too close
Set [Shake Reduction] to off and use a tripod.
Move away from the subject, or turn off the
Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 331 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Main Specifications
331
Model Description
Type
Lens Mount
Compatible Lens
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera with built-in retractable P-TTL flash
PENTAX K
AF2
bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information contacts, K-mount with power contacts)
K
AF3
, K
AF2
(power zoom not compatible), K
AF
, K
A
mount lenses
Image Capture Unit
Image Sensor
Effective Pixels
Total Pixels
Dust Removal
Sensitivity (Standard
Output)
Primary color filter, CMOS, Size: 23.6 × 15.8 (mm)
Approx. 12.4 megapixels
Approx. 12.9 megapixels
SP coating and CMOS sensor operations with the Dust Alert function
AUTO/200 to 12800 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV, or
1/3 EV), expandable from ISO 100 to ISO 25600. Up to ISO
1600 in h mode.
Image Stabilizer
Type
Effective
Compensation
Range
CMOS image sensor shift
Up to 4 EV (depending on the used lens type and shooting conditions)
File Formats
File Format
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Color Space
Storage Medium
Storage Folder
RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF2.0 compliant
JPEG: E (4288 × 2848 pixels), J (3936 × 2624 pixels),
P (3072 × 2048 pixels), i (1728 × 1152 pixels)
RAW: E (4288 × 2848 pixels)
RAW (12bit): PEF, DNG JPEG: C (Best), D (Better),
E (Good), RAW + JPEG simultaneous capturing compatible sRGB, AdobeRGB
SD/SDHC Memory Card
Date (100_1018, 100_1019...)/
PENTX (100PENTX, 101PENTX...)
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 332 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
332
Viewfinder
Type
Focusing
Screen
Penta-mirror viewfinder
Coverage (FOV) Approx. 96%
Magnification Approx. 0.85× (50 mm F1.4 · ∞ )
Eye-Relief Length
Approx. 19.1 mm (from the view window), Approx. 21.6 mm
(from the center of lens)
Diopter Adjustment Approx. -2.5 to +1.5m
-1
Natural-Bright-Matte II focusing screen
Live View
Type
Focusing Mechanism
Display
TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Contrast detection + Face detection, Contrast detection, Phase matching
Field of View approx. 100%, Magnified view ( = mode: 2×, 4×,
6×/ \ mode: 2×, 4×, 6×, 8×, 10×),
Grid display (4 × 4 Grid, Golden Section, Scale display), Bright/ dark area warning, Histogram
LCD Monitor
Type
Size
Dots
Adjustment
Wide viewing angle TFT color LCD
3.0 inches
Approx. 921,000 dots
Brightness and colors adjustable
Preview
Type
Optical preview and digital preview (can be assigned to the button from the menu)
|
11
White Balance
Auto
Preset
Manual
Fine Adjustment
TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light ( D : Daylight Color,
N : Daylight White, W : Cool White, L : Warm White), Tungsten
Light, Flash, f , Manual
Configuration using the display screen
Adjustable ±7 steps on A-B axis or G-M axis
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 333 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
333
Autofocus System
Type
Focus Sensor
Brightness Range
AF Mode
TTL: phase-matching autofocus
SAFOX IX, 11 points (9 cross type focus points in the center)
EV-1 to 18 (ISO100)
Auto AF ( f ), Single AF ( l ), Continuous AF ( k )
Focus priority or shutter priority mode for l
Focus priority or FPS priority mode for k
AF Point Selection Auto: 5 points, Auto: 11 points, Select, Center
AF Assist Light Dedicated LED AF assist light
Metering
Type
Exposure
Compensation
Exposure Mode
EV Compensation
AE Lock
TTL open aperture, 16 segmented metering, center-weighted and spot metering
EV1 to 21.5 (ISO200 · 50mm F1.4)
Auto Picture mode, Picture mode (Portrait, Landscape, Macro,
Moving Object, Night Scene Portrait, Flash Off)
Scene mode (Night Scene, Surf & Snow, Food, Sunset, Stage
Lighting, Night Snap, Night Scene HDR, Kids, Pet, Candlelight,
Museum)
* In Stage Lighting, Night Snap, and Night Scene HDR, the file format is fixed to JPEG.
Program, Sensitivity Priority, Shutter Priority, Aperture Priority,
Manual, Bulb
±3 EV (1/2 EV steps or 1/3 EV steps can be selected)
Can be assigned to = / L button from the menu. (Timer method: two times the meter operating time set in the custom function setting), Continuous as long as the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
Shutter
Type
Shutter Speed
Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter
Auto: 1/6000 to 30 sec., Manual: 1/6000 to 30 sec. (1/3 EV steps or 1/ 2EV steps), Bulb
Drive Modes
Mode Selection
Continuous Shooting
Single frame, Continuous (Hi, Lo), Self-timer (12s, 2s), Remote
Control (immediately, 3 sec., continuous), Auto Bracketing (3 frames)
Approx. 6 fps, JPEG ( E · C · Continuous Hi): up to 25 frames, RAW: up to 12 frames
Approx. 2 fps, JPEG ( E · C · Continuous Lo): until SD
Memory Card is full, RAW: up to 36 frames
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 334 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
334
Built-in Flash
Type
Flash Mode
Built-in P-TTL flash with serial control
GN: approx. 16 (ISO200/m), approx. 12 (ISO100/m)
Angle of view: equivalent to angle of view of 28mm lens (35mm format equivalent)
P-TTL, Red-eye Reduction, Slow-speed Sync, Trailing Curtain
Sync
High-Speed Sync and Wireless Sync are also available with
PENTAX dedicated external flash.
1/180 sec.
-2.0 to +1.0EV
Sync Speed
Flash Exposure
Compensation
Capture Functions
Custom Image
Noise Reduction
Dynamic Range
Setting
Lens Correction
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome
Slow Shutter Speed NR, High-ISO NR
Highlight Correction, Shadow Correction
Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction
Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft,
Starbust, Fish-eye, Custom Filter
Auto, Standard, Strong 1, Strong 2, Strong 3, Automatic composition correction function
Select the number of shots between 2 and 9. Auto EV adjustment available.
Capture Interval setting (1 sec. to 24 hr.), Start Interval setting
(immediate, designated time), Captures up to 999 images
11
Movie
File Format
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Sound
Recording Time
Custom Image
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
Motion JPEG (AVI) b (1280 × 720, 16:9, 25 fps), c (640 × 480, 4:3, 25 fps)
C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)
Built-in monaural microphone
Up to 25 minutes; automatically stops recording if the internal temperature of the camera becomes high.
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome
Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Color
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 335 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
335
Playback Functions
Playback View
Delete
Digital Filter
RAW Development
Edit
Single frame, image comparison, multi-image display (4, 9, 16,
36, 81 segmentation), display magnification (up to 16×, scrolling and quick magnification available), rotating, histogram
(Y histogram, RGB histogram), bright/dark area warning, detailed information display, copyright information display
(photographer, copyright holder), folder display, calendar display, slideshow
Delete single image, delete all, select & delete, delete folder, delete instant review image
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Sketch Filter, Water Color,
Pastel, Posterization, Miniature, Base Parameter Adjustment,
Monochrome, Color, Extract Color, Soft, Starburst, Fish-eye,
Slim, HDR, Custom Filter
File Format (JPEG), Custom Image, White Balance, Sensitivity,
High-ISO NR, Shadow Correction, Distortion Correction,
Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction, Color Space
Resize, Cropping (aspect ratio and slant adjustment available),
Index, Movie Edit (divide or delete selected frames), Capturing a JPEG still picture from a movie
Customization
Custom Functions
Mode Memory
Custom Button
22 items
13 items
| button (Green button, Custom Image, Optical preview,
Digital preview, Digital Filter, Cross Processing, One Push File
Format)
= / L button (AF, AE-L)
Text Size
World Time
Standard, Large
World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)
Language
English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish,
Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, and Japanese
AF Fine Adjustment ±10 steps, Uniform adjustment
Copyright Information
Names of “Photographer” and “Copyright Holder” are embedded to the image file.
Revision history can be checked using the provided software.
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 336 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
336
Power Supply
Battery Type
AC Adapter
Battery Life
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI109
With AA battery holder D-BH109 (optional), four AA batteries
(lithium, Ni-MH rechargeable, alkaline) can be used.
AC Adapter Kit K-AC109 (optional)
(With D-LI109)
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.
470 images,
(without flash usage): approx. 560 images
Playback time: approx. 300 minutes
(With AA lithium batteries)
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.
1,000 images,
(without flash usage): approx. 1,600 images
Playback time: approx. 620 minutes
* Tested in compliance with CIPA standard. Actual results may vary depending on the shooting conditions/ circumstances.
Interfaces
Connection Port USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible)/AV output terminal
USB Connection MSC/PTP
Video Output Format NTSC/PAL
Infrared Connection Infrared connection in/out (IrSimple)
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions
Approx. 125 mm (W) × 97 mm (H) × 68 mm (D) (excluding protrusions)
Weight
Approx. 544 g (body only), Approx. 598 g (including dedicated battery and SD Memory Card)
11
Accessories
Package Contents
Software
USB Cable I-USB7, Strap O-ST53, Rechargeable Lithium-ion
Battery D-LI109, Battery Charger D-BC109, Software (CD-
ROM) S-SW110,
<Mounted on the camera> Eyecup F
Q
, Hot shoe cover F
K
,
Body mount cover
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 337 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Glossary
337
AdobeRGB
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial printing. Wider range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of the color range so colors available only when printed are not lost when editing images on a computer. When an image is opened by non-compatible software, the colors look lighter.
AE Metering
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera, select from [Multi-segment Metering], [Center-weighted Metering] and
[Spot Metering].
AF point
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, select from [Auto], [Select] and [Spot].
Aperture
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing through the lens to the CMOS sensor.
Bright Portion
Overexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears white.
Camera Shake (Blur)
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, and raising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize the camera. As camera shake is most likely to occur when pressing the shutter release button, use the Shake Reduction function, Self-timer or Remote
Control shooting to prevent camera movement.
CMOS sensor
Photography element which converts light entering through the lens into electric signals that create an image.
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 338 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
338
Color Space
A defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,
[AdobeRGB], which supports a wider color gamut than sRGB, can be also used.
Color Temperature
This numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, and to a reddish color as the color temperature falls.
Dark Portion
Underexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears black.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture value, lens focal length, and distance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture value
(higher number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture value (smaller number) to decrease the depth of field.
DNG RAW file
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats are converted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images increases significantly.
11
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily be made by taking the images to a DPOF photo printing store.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 339 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
339
Dynamic Range (D-Range)
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.
This is the same as the term “Exposure latitude” used with silver halide film.
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, overexposed and/or underexposed areas are less likely to occur within the image, and when the dynamic range is narrow, all image tones can be reproduced sharply and accurately.
EV (Exposure Value)
Exposure value is determined by a combination of the aperture value and the shutter speed.
EV Compensation
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed and/or aperture value.
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Exposure Bracketing
For automatically changing exposure. When the shutter release button is pressed, three images are captured. The first one has no compensation, the second is underexposed and the third is over-exposed.
Histogram
A graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels. This is useful when you check the exposure level of an image.
ISO Sensitivity
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shot with a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.
However, images taken with a high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise.
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 340 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
340
11
JPEG
An image compression method. In this camera, select from C (Best),
D (Better), or E (Good). Images recorded in JPEG format are suited for viewing on your computer or attaching to e-mail.
ND (Neutral Density) Filter
A filter available in different saturation levels that adjusts the brightness without affecting the color tone of pictures.
Noise Reduction
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by slow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.
NTSC/PAL
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and China.
Quality Level
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression, the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as the compression rate rises.
RAW data
Unedited image data output from the CMOS sensor. RAW data is data before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at the time of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, and
Sharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW data is 12 bit data that contain 16 times the information of 8 bit JPEG data. Rich gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer and use the provided software to create image data with different settings, such as
JPEG.
Recorded Pixels
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels that compose a picture, the larger the image size.
Shutter Speed
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the CMOS sensor. The amount of light that strikes the CMOS sensor can be changed by altering the shutter speed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 341 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM sRGB (standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for computer monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.
Vignetting
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from the subject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially blocked by the lens.
White Balance
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source so that the subject appears to have the correct color.
341
11
342
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 342 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Index
11
Symbols
[
A Rec. Mode] Menu .... 87, 304
[ Q
[
R Set-up] Menu ......... 266, 308
[ A
....................................... 89, 309
Q
................................... 21, 23, 82
|
(Green) button ..... 21, 23, 197
m c
(EV Compensation) button ............................. 21, 117
K /
button ................... 21, 23, 78, 84
I
Auto Picture ........... 69, 92
=
\ Moving Object ................... 92
.
Night Scene Portrait ......... 92
d
Blue Sky .......................... 92
a
Flash Off ............................ 92
A
Night Scene ...................... 93
Q
Surf & Snow ..................... 93
K
Food .................................. 93
K
Z
Night Scene HDR ............ 93
R
Kids .................................... 93
Y Pet .................................... 93
U
Candlelight ........................ 93
E
Museum ........................... 93
C Movie .............................. 167
A
AC adapter ............................. 50
Accessories ......................... 320
Action in a
Adding the date ....................286
AdobeRGB ...................205, 337
AE Lock ................112, 120, 133
AE Metering ..................114, 337
AF Fine Adjustment ..............128
AF assist light .................19, 127
=
(Autofocus) ....................122
= /
AF coupler ..............................19
AF Mode ...............................125
AF point ........................129, 337
AF160FC ......................180, 321
AF200FG ......................180, 321
AF360FGZ ....................180, 321
AF540FGZ ....................180, 321
Alkaline batteries ....................46
Aperture ..........................96, 337
Aperture Priority Mode c
Aperture ring .................104, 314
Aspect ratio ..........................251
Auto Flash Discharge .............77
Auto Image Rotation .............222
Auto Picture
Auto Power Off .....................281
F
Autofocus =
c
.............................................108
AV cable ...............................242
AV device .............................242
B
Filter) ....................................253
Battery ......................43, 46, 282
Battery Type .........................282
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 343 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Beep .................................... 269
Blue Sky d
Bright areas ........... 31, 207, 337
Bright/Dark Area warning ..... 222
Brightness adjustment ......... 207
Brightness Level .................. 277
Brightness of the monitor ..... 277
Built-in Flash .......................... 75
Bulb shooting ....................... 113
C
Calendar display .................. 226
Camera shake ............. 141, 337
Candlelight U
Capture Mode ........................ 91
Card access lamp .................. 19
Catch-in Focus ..................... 136
Center-weighted .................. 115
Charging ................................ 43
City names ........................... 272
Cloudy (White Balance) ....... 200
CMOS sensor ...................... 337
CMOS sensor cleaning ........ 315
Color (Digital Filter) ...... 156, 254
Color of the monitor ............. 278
Color Space ................. 205, 338
Color Temperature ....... 202, 338
Computer ............................. 291
Continuous Autofocus .......... 133
Continuous mode k
Continuous Shooting ........... 149
Contrast (Custom Image) .... 213
Contrast AF .......................... 160
(flash) ................................... 189
Control panel ................... 26, 35
Copyright Holder .................. 283
Correct exposure ................... 96
Creating New Folders .......... 279
Cropping .............................. 251
Cross Processing ................. 216
343
f (White Balance) ...........200
Custom Filter (Digital Filters)
.....................................156, 254
Custom Image ......................213
[
.......................................89, 309
D
Dark areas ..............31, 208, 338
Date Adjustment .....................64
Date change .........................270
Daylight (White Balance) ......200
Daylight-Sync Shooting ..........80
DCF ......................................338
Default settings .....................304
Delete .............................84, 236
Delete all images ..................239
Delete folder .........................238
Deleting a single image ..........84
Depth of field ..................97, 338
Destination ...........................270
Detailed information display ...28
Developing ...........................259
Digital Filter ..................155, 253
Digital Preview ..............137, 140
Diopter adjustment .................58
Direct keys ................34, 86, 304
Display Color ........................276
Display language ............60, 273
Distortion ..............................211
DNG .............................196, 338
DPOF ...........................285, 338
Drive Mode .............................86
Dueling Images ....................246
Dust Alert ..............................316
Dust Removal .......................315
Dynamic Range ......99, 207, 339
E
E-dial ................................21, 23
E-dial in Program ..................105
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 344 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
344
11
Editing movies ..................... 171
Error message ..................... 325
EV ........................................ 339
EV Compensation ........ 117, 339
m c
(EV Compensation) button ............................. 21, 117
EV Steps .............................. 118
Exif ............................... 283, 339
Exposure ................................ 96
Exposure Bracketing .... 118, 339
Exposure mode .................... 103
..................................... 108, 109
External flash ....................... 180
Extract Color (Digital Filter)
..................................... 155, 254
Eyecup ................................... 58
F
Face Detection AF ............... 160
File Format ........... 195, 196, 296
File number .......................... 280
Filter ............................. 155, 253
............................................. 213
..................................... 155, 254
Flash .............................. 75, 173
Flash (White Balance) ......... 200
............................................... 81
Flash Off a
............................ 92
K /
button ................... 21, 23, 78, 84
Balance) ............................... 200
Focal length ......................... 143
Focus indicator .............. 70, 134
Focus Lock .......................... 132
Focus Mode ......................... 122
Focus mode lever .......... 21, 122
Focus point ...................129, 337
Focusing ...............................122
Focusing area .......................129
Folder display .......................225
Folder Name .........................279
Food K
...................................93
Format ..................................268
Four-way controller
(
2345 ) .........................21, 23
G
Game ....................................246
Green button ............21, 23, 197
Grid display ..........................161
Guide Display .................24, 274
Guide indicator .......................32
H
HDR (Digital Filter) ...............254
HDR Capture ........................209
Help ......................................300
High Contrast (Digital Filter)
.....................................155, 253
High Dynamic Range ...........209
(Custom Image) ....................213
High-ISO NR ........................100
Highlight Correction ..............207
(flash) ...................................182
Histogram .......................30, 339
Hometown ............................270
Hue (Custom Image) ............213
I
Image Comparison ...............228
Image plane indicator .............19
Image storage capacity ..........55
Image Tone ..........................213
Index .....................................229
button ...............21, 23, 27
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 345 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Infrared port ........................... 19
Infrared transmission ........... 244
Initial settings ......................... 60
Initializing ............................. 268
Input Focal Length ............... 143
Installing software ................ 296
Instant Review ............... 71, 276
Interval Shooting .................. 151
IrSimple ................................ 244
ISO Sensitivity ............... 98, 339
J
JPEG ........................... 195, 340
JPEG Quality ................. 54, 193
....................................... 54, 192
K
Kelvin ........................... 202, 338
Kids
R .................................... 93
L
Landscape s
Language setting ........... 60, 273
............................................. 211
LCD Color Tuning ................ 278
Lens ............................... 56, 312
Lens Correction ................... 211
Lens information contacts ...... 19
Lens mount index .................. 19
Lens unlock button ..... 19, 21, 57
..................................... 104, 314
Lithium batteries .................... 46
Live View ............................. 159
Locking the exposure ... 120, 133
Locking the focus ................. 132
U button ....................... 21, 162
345
M
a (Manual) Mode .................110
Macintosh .............................292
Macro q
.................................92
Main switch .................21, 23, 59
Manual Flash Discharge .........78
Manual focus
Manual Mode
Manual White Balance .........202
Mass Storage Class .............294
Matte Field ............................135
Memory ................................288
3
button .............21, 23, 37
Menu operation ......................37
Menu page display ...............275
Meter Operating Time ..........116
Metering method ..................114
\
(Manual focus) ...............134
Miniature (Digital Filter) ........253
Mirror Lock-up ......................145
Mirror Up ..............................318
Mode dial ..........................21, 91
Monitor ...................................24
.............................................253
Movie ....................................165
Moving Object \
MSC .....................................294
Multi-exposure ......................153
Multi-image display ...............224
Multiple flash shooting ..........188
Multi-segment .......................114
Museum
E ............................93
N
ND (Neutral Density) Filter ...340
Night Scene
Night Scene HDR Z
Night Scene Portrait .
Night Snap
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 346 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
346
11
............................................... 46
Noise Reduction .......... 100, 340
NTSC ........................... 243, 340
O
button ............... 21, 23, 130
One Push File Format .......... 198
Optical Preview ............ 137, 139
Optional accessories ........... 320
P e
(Program) Mode .............. 104
PAL .............................. 243, 340
Pastel (Digital Filter) ............ 253
PC/AV terminal .................... 242
PEF ...................................... 196
Utility 4 ................................. 296
Pet Y
.................................... 93
Phase Difference AF ............ 160
Photographer information .... 283
Picture mode .......................... 92
Picture Transfer Protocol ..... 294
Pixel Mapping ...................... 287
Pixels ................................... 192
Playback ................................ 82
Q
................................... 21, 23, 82
[ Q
..................................... 220, 307
Playback time ........................ 49
Playing back images continuously ......................... 232
Playing back movies ............ 169
Portrait
= ............................... 92
Posterization (Digital Filter) .. 253
Power ..................................... 59
Press fully .............................. 72
Press halfway ........................ 72
Preview .................................137
Product registration ..............301
Program Mode e
Protect ..................................240
Provided software .................296
PTP ......................................294
P-TTL (Flash) .......................186
P-TTL Auto (Flash) ...............181
Q
.......................54, 165, 193, 340
Quick Zoom ..........................222
R
RAW .............................195, 340
RAW Development ...............259
RAW File Format ..................196
[ A
.......................54, 165, 192, 340
Red-eye reduction ..........79, 186
Remaining image storage capacity ..................................49
Remote Control ....................147
Reset ....................................310
Resize ..................................250
Retro (Digital Filter) ......155, 253
Rotate ...................................235
S
.............................................213
H (Scene) mode .................93
SD Memory Card ....................52
Select & Delete .....................236
Self-timer ..............................145
Sensitivity ...............................98
Sensitivity Priority Mode K
.............................................106
Sensor Cleaning ...................318
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 347 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
[
R Set-up] Menu ......... 266, 308
Shade (White Balance) ........ 200
Shadow Correction .............. 208
Shake Reduction ......... 141, 166
............................................. 213
Shooting Information .............. 25
Show Grid ............................ 161
Shutter Priority Mode b
................................... 21, 23, 72
Shutter speed ................ 96, 340
Single mode l
Sketch Filter (Digital Filter)
............................................. 253
Slideshow ............................ 232
Slim (Digital Filter) ............... 254
Slow Shutter Speed NR ....... 102
Slow-speed Sync ................. 174
Soft (Digital Filter) ........ 155, 254
Sound .................................. 166
Spot Metering ...................... 115
sRGB ........................... 205, 341
Stage Lighting n
..................................... 155, 254
Status display ...................... 276
Status screen ......................... 25
Strap ...................................... 42
Sunset
K ............................. 93
Superimpose AF Area ......... 129
Surf & Snow
K
............................................. 106
T
............................................. 149
Text Size .............................. 274
Toning (Custom Image) ....... 213
.....................................155, 253
Trailing Curtain Sync ....176, 187
Transmission method ...........245
Tungsten Light (White Balance)
.............................................200
TV .........................................242
b
(Shutter Priority) Mode ....107
U
USB Connection ...................293
USB Connection mode .........293
V
Video Output Format ............243
Viewfinder .........................32, 58
Vignetting .............................341
W
Water Color (Digital Filter) ....253
White Balance ..............200, 341
Windows ...............................292
Wireless flash control ...........186
Wireless Mode (Flash) .........183
World Time ...........................270
Write-protect ...........................53
Z
Zoom display ........................223
Zoom lens ...............................74
347
11
348
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 348 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
WARRANTY POLICY
11
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering, battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions, or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties, whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by nonauthorized PENTAX service facilities.
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 349 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing, please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the service station to proceed with the servicing.
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the warranty policy.
349
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European
Union.
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 350 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
350
11
For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material, which may require special handling.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 351 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Declaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We: PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
Located at: 600 12 Street, Suite 300
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera
Model Number:
W
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: October, 2010, Colorado
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 352 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must be treated separately and in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these products.
Following the implementation by member states, private households within the EU states may return their used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designated collection facilities free of charge*.
In some countries your local retailer may also take back your old product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.
*Please contact your local authority for further details.
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health which could otherwise arise due to inappropriate waste handling.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don’t purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a designation for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemicals involved.
OPKR00101/ENG
HOYA CORPORATION
PENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-36-9, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX Europe Imaging Systems S.A.S.
(European Headquarters) 112 Quai de Bezons - BP 204,
95106 Argenteuil Cedex, FRANCE
(HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)
(France - http://www.pentax.fr )
PENTAX Imaging Systems GmbH
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse, 104, 22527 Hamburg, GERMANY
(http://www.pentax.de )
PENTAX Imaging Systems Limited
PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough,
Berks SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)
PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401, U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
250 North 54th Street Chandler, AZ 85226, U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
PENTAX Canada Inc.
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7, CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
PENTAX Trading (SHANGHAI) Limited
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
OPKR00101/ENG Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2010
FOM 01.09.2010 Printed in Europe
İndir
Herkese açık bağlantı güncellendi
Sohbetinize giden herkese açık bağlantı güncellendi. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Belge herkese açık bağlantısı
Reklam
